Filler/Dispenser/IBC HI-3010

Filler/Dispenser/IBC HI-3010
Filler/Dispenser/IBC
HI-3010
INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUAL
Hard Instruments Document Number: 0596-0256-01 REV N
Local Field Service
Hardy has over 200 field technicians in the U.S., and more positioned throughout the world to assist you in your support needs. We also have factory engineers who will travel to your facility anywhere in the world to help you solve
challenging applications. We're ready to support you with:
•
•
•
•
Installation and start-up
Routine maintenance and certification
Plant audits and performance measurement
Emergency troubleshooting and repair
To request Emergency Service and Troubleshooting, Start-up, Installation, Calibration, Verification or to discuss a
Maintenance Agreement please call 800-821-5831 Ext. 1757 or Emergency Service after hours (Standard Hours 6:00
AM to 6:00 PM Pacific Standard Time) and weekends Ext. 1111.
Outside the U.S
Hardy Instruments has built a network of support throughout the globe. For specific field service options available in
your area please contact your local sales agent or our U.S. factory at +1 858-292-2710, Ext. 1757.
i
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -i
Table of Illustrations
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -I
Chapter 1
Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - General Introduction to the Hardy Filler/Dispenser/IBC HI 3010
Service Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Typical Applications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hardy Web Tech - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Connectivity- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Setup Wizards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mapped I/O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WAVERSAVER® - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C2® Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - On-Board Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Secure Memory Module (SMM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Relays - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Serial Port- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -JB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HI 3000-RC- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -PB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -AC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -RIO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Smart Diagnostics (-SD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -MB - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Communication Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EtherNet/IP™ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MOD-Bus/TPC/IP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OPC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Remote I/O (RIO) Interface to the Allen Bradley Network
Profibus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-1
-1
-2
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-4
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-5
-6
Chapter 2
Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Chapter 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Specifications for a Standard Instrument - - - - - Specifications for I/O Option Boards - - - - - - - Profibus Option Board - - - - - - - - - - - - ControlNet Option Board - - - - - - - - - - RIO Option Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - EtherNet/IP™ Option Card - - - - - - - - - Specifications for Peripherals/Systems Components -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-7
-7
-7
-8
-8
-9
-9
-9
- 10
Chapter 3
Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Chapter 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unpacking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Disassembly and Reassembly Notes and Cautions Mechanical Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - Installing the HI 3010 in a Panel - - - - - - Panel Cutout Specifications - - - - - - Installing the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser - Installing the HI 3010 in a Swivel/Wall Mount
About the Swivel/Wall Mount - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- 11
- 11
- 11
- 11
- 12
- 12
- 12
- 12
- 13
- 13
-
- - - - - -1
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Installing Printed Circuit Boards - - - - Installing the Smart Diagnostics (-SD) Card - Removing Printed Circuit Boards - - - - Electrical Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - Cabling and Interconnecting - - - - - - Recommended Installation Procedures
AC Power Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - -DC Power Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - Load Point Connections - - - - - - - - - - C2® Load Point Connection - - - - - - Non-C2 Load Point Connection- - - - - LVDT and Half Bridge Load Cells/Sensors
Junction Box Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - Installation of Secure Memory Module (SMM)
Transferring a Secure Memory Module - Chapter 4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
15
16
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Chapter 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Getting Started - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Help Dialog - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Help Dialog - - - - - - - - - - - - Configuring the Filler/Dispenser from the Front Panel
Front Panel Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - Button Functions- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Help Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Manual Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - Print Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Up/Down - Left/Right Buttons - - - - - - Enter Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Exit Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clear Button- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Ing./1 Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2/ABC Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Setup/3/DEF Button - - - - - - - - - - - Amount/4/GHI - - - - - - - - - - - - - Units/5/JKL Button - - - - - - - - - - - 6/MNO Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - Cycle/7/PQRS Button - - - - - - - - - - 8/TUV Button - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Test/9/WXYZ Button - - - - - - - - - - User/-/_/@/blank/,/. Button- - - - - - - - 0/(/)/*/+/#/&/’ Button - - - - - - - - - - Selecting Configuration Menus - - - - - - - - Configuring Ingredients from the Front Panel - About Configuring Ingredients - - - - - - Ingredient Name Parameter- - - - - - - - - - Fill Cycles - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Fill/Dispense Cycles - - - - - - - Target Weight - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Target Weight - - - - - - - - - - Target Preact - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Target Preact - - - - - - - - - - - About Smart Preact - - - - - - - - - - - Target Window - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Target Window - - - - - - - - - - Jog Parameters- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
27
ii
iii
Table of Contents
About Jog Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fill/Dispense Time Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Fill/Dispense Timer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Wait Timer Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Wait Timer- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Speed Parameter29
About the Speed Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Instrument Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Operator ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Operator ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Instrument ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Instrument ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OK to Fill Input Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About OK to Fill Input Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - Discharge Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Discharge Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - About Proof Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Auxiliary Device Timer - - - - - - - - - - - Refill Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Filler Refill Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - About the Dispenser/IBC Refill Parameters- - - - - - - Serial Port Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Serial Port Setup Parameters- - - - - - - - - Totalizer Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Totalizer Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unit of Measure Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Unit of Measure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Decimal Point Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Decimal Point Parameter - - - - - - - - - - Total Decimal Point Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Total Decimal Point Parameter - - - - - - - Motion Tolerance Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Motion Tolerance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Zero Tolerance Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Zero Tolerance Parameter - - - - - - - - - - About the Auto Zero Tolerance Parameter - - - - - - - Tare Limit Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Tare Limit Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - Averages Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Averages Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - Scale Capacity Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Scale Capacity Parameter - - - - - - - - - - The WAVERSAVER® Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the WAVERSAVER Parameter - - - - - - - - - Set Clock Parameter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Setting the Clock - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Timezones (Greenwich Mean Time)- - - - - - - DeviceNet Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the DeviceNet Parameters- - - - - - - - - - - - Ethernet Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About the Ethernet Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - About IP Addresses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - This Completes the Configuration of the Instrument from
the Front Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Configuring the Filler/Dispenser from the Web Browser - - - - - Configuring Ingredients from the Browser - - - - - - - - - - - About Configuring Ingredients- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
- 27
- 28
- 28
- 28
- 28
-
-
-
-
-
- 29
- 30
- 31
- 31
- 31
- 31
- 32
- 32
- 32
- 32
- 33
- 34
- 34
- 34
- 34
- 36
- 36
- 37
- 37
- 38
- 38
- 38
- 38
- 39
- 39
- 39
- 39
- 39
- 39
- 39
- 40
- 40
- 41
- 41
- 41
- 41
- 41
- 41
- 42
- 42
- 43
- 44
- 44
- 45
- 45
- 45
-
-
-
-
-
- 46
- 46
- 47
- 47
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Changing the Ingredient Name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Changing the Ingredient Name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The Browser Ingredient Setup is Complete - - - - - - - - Instrument Setup from the Browser - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Refill Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Discharge Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Serial Port Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Set Date/Clock Parameters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The Browser Instrument Setup is Complete - - - - - - - - Options Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Smart Diagnostics (-SD) Card Configuration from the Front Panel
Smart Diagnostics Card Configuration from the Web Browser - -
-
-
-
-
48
48
50
50
53
53
53
54
55
55
55
55
Chapter 5
Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Chapter 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Getting Started - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Binding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Electrical Check Procedures - - - - - - - C2 Calibration From the Front Panel - - - - - About The Gravitation Correction Factor
C2 Calibration From the Web Page - - - - - - Traditional Calibration From the Front Panel - About Traditional Calibration- - - - - - - Traditional Calibration From the Web Page - - -
-
-
-
-
-
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
60
61
61
63
Chapter 6
Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mapping to an HI 3010 with a pre-2.3 Firmware Version- - - - Mapping to an Output Relay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Example #2 Mapping to an Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mapping Multiple Sources - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Simple Network Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mapping to a Network Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mapping a Network Input to a Local Output - - - - - - - Unmapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - More Advanced Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Glossary of Mapping Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Rules for Hardy Control Link Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - Local Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Local Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Volatile and Non-Volatile Memory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A Definition of Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Local Mapping Example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Local Mapping Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Network Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Network Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Hardy Control Link Network Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - Boolean Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Analog Mapping- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mixed Mapping - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Special (Command) Mapping) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Command Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Parameter Numbers, Code Explanations and Valid Ranges - - - Mapping From the Front Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Unmapping Procedures for Front Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - Mapping a Hardy Control-Link Network to a ControlNet/DeviceNet/
Profibus Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
65
65
65
65
69
69
71
71
71
72
73
73
74
74
74
74
74
75
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
81
82
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - - - 83
iv
v
Table of Contents
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Chapter 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Disassembly and Reassembly Notes and Cautions - - - - - - - - - - Error Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - List of Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Not OK to FILL Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Lost OK to Fill Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fast Gate Did Not Open Alarm- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fast Gate Did Not Close Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Slow Gate Did Not Open Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Slow Gate Did Not Close Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Underfill /Overfill Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Dispense Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Over Refill Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Refill Timeout Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Not OK to Dispense Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Lost OK to Dispense Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fast Gate Did Not Open Alarm- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Fast Gate Did Not Close Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Slow Gate Did Not Open - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Slow Gate Did Not Close - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Under Dispense/Over Dispense Alarms- - - - - - - - - - - - - IBC/Dispense Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Change IBC Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Jog Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Jog Gate Did Not Open Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Jog Gate Did Not Close Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Jog Count Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Discharge Alarms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Not OK to Discharge Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Discharge Gate Did Not Open Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Clogged Gate Alarm- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Discharge Gate Did Not Close Alarm- - - - - - - - - - - - - - General Troubleshooting Flow Chart Index - - - - - - - - - - - - - A - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating Systems - - - B - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating Systems (Cont’d)
B1 - Guidelines for Instabilities on Former Operating Systems (Cont’d)
B2 - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating Systems:
Mechanical Stability and Configuration Settings. - - - - - - - - - C - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating Systems - - - C1 - Guidelines for Instabilities on formerly operating systems with
Smart Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - E - Non-Return to Zero - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - F - Verify Individual Load Cell Milli-Volt Readings- - - - - - - - - F(a) - Verify Individual Load Cell Readings Using Smart Diagnostics G - A/D Failure Error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - H - Mechanical Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - J - Electrical Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - K - Load Sharing and Load Sensor Checkout - - - - - - - - - - - - M - Weight Reading Stops Incrementing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - N - Blank Screen110
O - Display Stuck on a Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - R - View Input States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S - Forcing Outputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Integrity Check and Fault Determination From the Front Panel Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
- 85
- 85
- 85
- 85
- 85
- 85
- 86
- 86
- 86
- 87
- 87
- 88
- 88
- 88
- 89
- 89
- 89
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 91
- 91
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 93
- 94
- 94
- 94
- 94
- 94
- 95
- 96
- 97
- 98
- - - - 99
- - - - 100
-
-
-
- 101
- 102
- 103
- 104
- 105
- 106
- 107
- 108
- 109
-
-
-
- 111
- 112
- 113
- 114
- 114
- 114
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Checking the Device Data List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Voltage & Weight Displays - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Stability Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Factory Defaults - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Return to Zero Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - View Input States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Force Outputs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - State Logging - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Using Solid State Relays with Light Loads (Optional Set Relays) About Solid State Relays With Light Loads - - - - - - - - System Integrity Check and Fault Determination From the Web
Browser - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Smart Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Using Smart Diagnostics From the Front Panel - - - - - - - - Stability Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Using Smart Diagnostics From the Web Browser - - - - - - - - - Overview of Typical Load Cell System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Troubleshooting The Network Connections and Configuration
with the "Ping" Tool - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Selecting the module by number for Testing - - - - - - - - - - Exiting the Root Directory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - About Solid State Relays With Light Loads - - - - - - - - - - - - SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - General Policies and Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: - - - - - - - - - - Ordering Replacement Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - System Support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Warranty- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Dictionary of Mapping
Symbols
Index
-
-
-
-
114
120
120
122
122
123
124
124
125
126
126
-
-
-
-
126
126
127
127
129
130
132
-
-
-
-
133
133
133
133
133
134
134
134
134
134
vi
I
Table of Illustrations
Table of Illustrations
Chapter 1
Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
FIG. 1-1
FIG. 1-2
FIG. 1-3
FIG. 1-4
FIG. 1-5
FIG. 1-6
Chapter 3
- - -2
- - -2
- - -2
- - -3
- - -5
- - -5
Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 11
FIG. 3-1
FIG. 3-2
FIG. 3-3
FIG. 3-4
FIG. 3-5
FIG. 3-6
FIG. 3-7
FIG. 3-8
FIG. 3-9
FIG. 3-10
FIG. 3-11
FIG. 3-12
FIG. 3-13
FIG. 3-14
FIG. 3-15
FIG. 3-16
FIG. 3-17
FIG. 3-18
FIG. 3-19
FIG. 3-20
FIG. 3-21
Chapter 4
FILLING A VESSEL USING A FEEDER - - - - - - FILLING INTO A VESSEL FROM ANOTHER VESSEL
DISPENSING INTO A VESSEL FROM A FEEDER - DISPENSING (LOSS-IN-WEIGHT) FROM A VESSEL
TO ANOTHER VESSEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD - - - - - - - - - - - SMART DIAGNOSTICS REAR PANEL - - - - - - - -
REAR PANEL CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT 1 - - - - - PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - PANEL MOUNT INSTALLATION - - - - - - - - - - - - NEMA 4 GASKET FLUSH AGAINST THE FRONT
PANEL OF THE ENCLOSURE - - - - - - - - - - - - INSTALLING THE SWIVEL MOUNT TO A
HORIZONTAL SURFACE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLING IN A SWIVEL MOUNT
FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLED IN A SWIVEL MOUNT INSTALLING THE SWIVEL MOUNT TO A VERTICAL
SURFACE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLING IN A SWIVEL
WALL MOUNT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLED IN A SWIVEL/
WALL MOUNT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD INSTALLATION/LINING UP
BOARDS WITH THE SLOTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD INSTALLATION/SLIDING
THE BOARD INTO THE INSTRUMENT - - - - - - - - MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD INSTALLED WITH REAR
PLATE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REAR PLATE FASTENERS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - STANDOFF LOCATIONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - POWER WIRING DIAGRAM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION - - - - - - - - - REAR PANEL/LOAD POINT CONNECTIONS - - - - - JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS - - - - - - - - - - - SECURE MEMORY MODULE (SMM) - - - - - - - - - INSTALLING THE SECURE MEMORY MODULE - - - - -
-2
- 12
- 12
- 13
- 13
- 14
- 14
- 14
- 15
- 15
- 15
- 15
-
16
16
16
17
18
18
18
19
19
Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 21
FIG. 4-1
FIG. 4-2
FIG. 4-3
FIG. 4-4
FIG. 4-5
FIG. 4-6
FRONT PANEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - PRINT SCREEN DEFAULT - - - - - - - - - - - - DIRECTIONAL BUTTONS - - - - - - - - - - - - - LIST SELECTION/ENTER BUTTON - - - - - - - - WELCOME DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INSTRUMENT SELECTION SCREEN WITH FILLER
SELECTED (DEFAULT) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-7 PROMPT CONFIRMING SELECTION - - - - - - - FIG. 4-8 STANDBY DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-9 CONFIGURATION MENU/ADJUST INGREDIENT - FIG. 4-10 ADJUST INGREDIENT SUB-MENU/INGREDIENT #1
-
-
-
21
22
22
22
23
-
-
-
23
23
23
24
24
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 4-11
FIG. 4-12
FIG. 4-13
FIG. 4-14
FIG. 4-15
FIG. 4-16
FIG. 4-17
FIG. 4-18
FIG. 4-19
FIG. 4-20
FIG. 4-21
FIG. 4-22
FIG. 4-23
FIG. 4-24
FIG. 4-25
FIG. 4-26
FIG. 4-27
FIG. 4-28
FIG. 4-29
FIG. 4-30
FIG. 4-31
FIG. 4-32
FIG. 4-33
FIG. 4-34
FIG. 4-35
FIG. 4-36
FIG. 4-37
FIG. 4-38
FIG. 4-39
FIG. 4-40
FIG. 4-41
FIG. 4-42
FIG. 4-43
FIG. 4-44
FIG. 4-45
FIG. 4-46
FIG. 4-47
FIG. 4-48
FIG. 4-49
FIG. 4-50
FIG. 4-51
FIG. 4-52
FIG. 4-53
FIG. 4-54
FIG. 4-55
FIG. 4-56
FIG. 4-57
FIG. 4-58
FIG. 4-59
FIG. 4-60
FIG. 4-61
FIG. 4-62
FIG. 4-63
FIG. 4-64
FIG. 4-65
INGREDIENT 1 SUB-MENU/ENTER INGREDIENT NAME
CLEARING INGREDIENT NAME - - - - - - - - - - - - INGREDIENT NAME ENTERED/FLOUR - - - - - - - - INGREDIENT MENU/FILL/DISPENSE CYCLES - - - - FILL/DISPENSE/CYCLES PARAMETER - - - - - - - - INGREDIENT MENU/TARGET WEIGHT - - - - - - - - TARGET WEIGHT PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - TARGET PREACT PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - TARGET PREACT SUB-MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - TARGET PREACT MENU/SET PREACT - - - - - - - - TARGET PREACT MENU/SMART PREACT - - - - - - INGREDIENT SETUP MENU/SELECTING TARGET
WINDOW/WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INGREDIENT SETUP MENU/SELECTING TARGET
WINDOW/PERCENTAGE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TARGET WINDOW/WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TARGET WINDOW/PERCENTAGE - - - - - - - - - - ADJUST INGREDIENT 1/JOG - - - - - - - - - - - - - ADJUST INGREDIENT 1/JOG - - - - - - - - - - - - - JOG MENU/DEFAULT SETTINGS - - - - - - - - - - - JOG COUNT PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JOG OFF TIME PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILL TIMER PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WAIT TIMER PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SPEED PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILL PROOF MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DUAL SPEED FILLER MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - DUAL SPEED FILLER/FILL PROOF MENU - - - - - - - FILL PROOF MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FILL PROOF MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ADJUST INGREDIENT/INGREDIENT 1 SET TO FLOUR SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INGREDIENT 2 - - - - CONFIGURATION MENU/SETUP - - - - - - - - - - - SETUP MENU/OPERATOR ID - - - - - - - - - - - - - INSTRUMENT ID PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - - INSTRUMENT ID MENU/CHEM 3 FILLER - - - - - - - OK TO FILL INPUT PARAMETER - - - - - - - - - - - OK TO FILL MENU/SETTING OK TO FILL TIMER - - - SETUP MENU/DISCHARGE PARAMETER - - - - - - - DISCHARGE MENU/AUTO-DISCHARGE - - - - - - - DISCHARGE MENU/OK TO DISCHARGE - - - - - - - OK TO DISCHARGE MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DISCHARGE MENU/PROOF SWITCH - - - - - - - - - DISCHARGE MENU/SWITCH TIMER - - - - - - - - - DISCHARGE MENU/AUXILIARY DEVICE TIMER - - - SETUP MENU/REFILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFILL MENU/REFILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFILL MENU/INITIAL REFILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - SETUP MENU/REFILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFILL MENU/REFILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFILL MENU/INITIAL REFILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL PROOF SWITCH - - REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL SWITCH TIMER - - - REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL WEIGHT - - - - - - - REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL TIMER - - - - - - - - SETUP MENU/SERIAL PORT - - - - - - - - - - - - - SERIAL PORT MENU/PRINTER PORT SETUP - - - - -
- 24
- 24
- 24
- 25
- 25
- 25
- 25
- 26
- 26
- 26
- 26
- 26
- 27
- 27
- 27
- 27
- 28
- 28
- 28
- 28
- 28
- 29
- 29
- 29
- 29
- 30
- 30
- 30
- 30
- 30
- 31
- 31
- 31
- 31
- 32
- 32
- 33
- 33
- 33
- 33
- 33
- 33
- 34
- 34
- 34
- 34
- 35
- 35
- 35
- 35
- 35
- 36
- 36
- 36
- 36
II
III
Table of Illustrations
FIG. 4-66
FIG. 4-67
FIG. 4-68
FIG. 4-69
FIG. 4-70
FIG. 4-71
PRINTER PORT MENU/BAUD RATE - - - - - - - - - PRINTER PORT MENU/PARITY - - - - - - - - - - - - PRINTER PORT MENU/DATA BITS - - - - - - - - - - PRINTER PORT MENU/AUTO PRINT - - - - - - - - - SETUP MENU/TOTALIZER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOTALIZER MENU/CHOOSING INGREDIENT
TOTALIZER NUMBER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-72 TOTALIZER NUMBER MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-73 CLEARING ALL TOTALS FOR ALL 12 INGREDIENTS - FIG. 4-74 SETUP MENU/UNIT OF MEASURE - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-75 SETUP MENU/DECIMAL POINT - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-76 SETUP MENU/TOTAL DECIMAL POINT - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-77 SETUP MENU/MOTION TOLERANCE - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-78 SETUP MENU/ZERO TOLERANCE - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-79 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/ZERO TOLERANCE - - - - FIG. 4-80 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/USE AUTO ZERO - - - - - FIG. 4-81 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/AUTO ZERO TOLERANCE FIG. 4-82 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/AUTO ZERO TIME - - - - FIG. 4-83 SETUP MENU/TARE LIMIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-84 SETUP MENU/AVERAGES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-85 SETUP MENU/SCALE CAPACITY - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-86 SETUP MENU/WAVERSAVER - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-87 SETUP MENU/SET CLOCK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-88 CLOCK SETUP MENU/SET HOURS - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-89 CLOCK SETUP MENU/SET MONTH - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-90 CLOCK SETUP MENU/SET GMT - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-91 SETUP MENU/DEVICENET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-92 DEVICENET MENU/BAUD RATE - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-93 DEVICENET MENU/NODE ADDRESS - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-94 SETUP MENU/ETHERNET - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-95 ETHERNET MENU/IP ADDRESS WITH DEFAULT
IP ADDRESS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-96 ENTER IP ADDRESS IN BROWSER ADDRESS FIELD - FIG. 4-97 SYSTEM WEB PAGE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-98 CONFIGURATION WEB PAGE - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-99 CONFIGURATION - ADJUST INGREDIENT WEB PAGE FIG. 4-100 EDIT INGREDIENT PULL DOWN MENU - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-101 CONFIGURATION - ADJUST INGREDIENT - - - - - - FIG. 4-102 CONFIGURATION - PULL DOWN MENU - - - - - - - FIG. 4-103 CONFIGURATION - ADJUST INGREDIENT - - - - - - FIG. 4-104 CONFIGURATION/INGREDIENT NAME CHANGE - - - FIG. 4-105 CONFIGURATION/INGREDIENT NAME - FLOUR - - - FIG. 4-106 SETTING JOG COUNT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-107 ADJUST INGREDIENT 7 PAGE 2 - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-108 TARGET WEIGHT TOLERANCE PULL DOWN MENU - FIG. 4-109 SPEED SELECTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-110 CONFIGURATION PAGE/SELECT INSTRUMENT SETUP
FIG. 4-111 INSTRUMENT SETUP FILLER - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-112 UNITS OF MEASURE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-113 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SELECTING GRAD SIZE - - - - FIG. 4-114 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SELECTING THE DECIMAL
POINT POSITION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-115 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SETTING TOTAL DECIMAL
POINT POSITION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-116 INSTRUMENT SETUP/PAGE 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-117 INSTRUMENT SETUP PAGE 2/SETTING WAVERSAVER
FIG. 4-118 INSTRUMENT SETUP/REFILL AND DISCHARGE PAGE -
-
37
37
37
37
37
-
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
43
44
45
45
45
-
45
46
46
46
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
49
49
50
50
50
51
51
51
- 52
-
52
52
53
53
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 4-119 INSTRUMENT SETUP/PRINTER PORT - - - - - - - FIG. 4-120 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SERIAL PORT - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-121 PRINTER PORT SETUP/PARITY - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-122 PRINTER PORT SETUP/DATA BITS - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-123 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SET DATE/SET CLOCK/SET
TIMEZONE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-124 CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING OPTIONS - - FIG. 4-125 OPTIONS/SELECTING SMART DIAGNOSTICS
CONTROL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FIG. 4-126 SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD MENU/CHANNELS 1,2,3
FIG. 4-127 SMART DIAGNOSTICS/ENABLING CHANNEL 1 - - - FIG. 4-128 SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD MENU/CHANNEL 2,3,4 FIG. 4-129 HOME PAGE/SELECTING CONFIGURATION - - - - FIG. 4-130 CONFIGURATION PAGE/SELECT OPTIONS - - - - FIG. 4-131 CONFIGURATION OPTIONS/SELECTING SMART
DIAGNOSTICS CARD CONFIGURATION - - - - - - FIG. 4-132 SMART DIAGNOSTIC CARD CONFIGURATION - - - Chapter 5
Chapter 6
-
- 53
- 54
- 54
- 54
- - 54
- - 55
-
- 55
- 55
- 55
- 55
- 56
- 56
- - 56
- - 56
Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 57
FIG. 5-1
FIG. 5-2
FIG. 5-3
FIG. 5-4
FIG. 5-5
FIG. 5-6
FIG. 5-7
FIG. 5-8
FIG. 5-9
FIG. 5-10
FIG. 5-11
FIG. 5-12
FIG. 5-13
FIG. 5-14
FIG. 5-15
FIG. 5-16
FIG. 5-17
FIG. 5-18
FIG. 5-19
FIG. 5-20
FIG. 5-21
FIG. 5-22
FIG. 5-23
FIG. 5-24
FIG. 5-25
FIG. 5-26
FIG. 5-27
FIG. 5-28
PROPERLY INSTALLED LOAD CELL WITH NO BINDING
CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING SETUP - - - - CALIBRATION MENU/C2 CAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - CALIBRATION/SELECTING CAL TYPE - - - - - - - - C2 CALIBRATION SUB-MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - ENTERING THE REFERENCE POINT - - - - - - - - - GRAVITY CORRECTION FACTOR - - - - - - - - - - - GRAVITY/CLEARING ENTRY - - - - - - - - - - - - - GRAVITY CORRECTION FACTOR/MEXICO CITY - - - DO C2 CALIBRATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING SETUP - - - - CONFIGURATION PAGE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - C2 CALIBRATION SUB-MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - SENSOR TYPE PULL DOWN LIST - - - - - - - - - - - C2 CALIBRATION/ENTERING REFERENCE WEIGHT - CAL COMPLETED OK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CONFIGURATION MENU/CALIBRATION - - - - - - - CALIBRATION MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CALIBRATION/TRADITIONAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/ZERO VALUE - - - - - - DO TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/ZERO - - - - - - - - TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/SPAN VALUE - - - - - - TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/SPAN - - - - - - - - - - CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING SETUP - - - - CONFIGURATION PAGE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CALIBRATION SUB-MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CAL LOW COMPLETED OK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - CAL HIGH COMPLETED OK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Mapping
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65
FIG. 6-1
FIG. 6-2
FIG. 6-3
HOME PAGE/SELECTING CONFIGURATION - - - - - CONFIGURATION PAGE/SELECTING MAPPING SETUP
CONFIGURATION MAPPING SETUP 1/SELECTING A
DESTINATION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOCAL OUTPUT/SELECTING OUTPUT RELAY #1 - - OUTPUT RELAY #1 ADDRESS HO0.0 - - - - - - - - - -
FIG. 6-4
FIG. 6-5
- 57
- 58
- 58
- 58
- 58
- 58
- 59
- 59
- 59
- 59
- 60
- 60
- 60
- 61
- 61
- 61
- 61
- 62
- 62
- 62
- 62
- 62
- 62
- 63
- 63
- 63
- 63
- 64
- 65
- 66
- 66
- 67
- 67
IV
V
Table of Illustrations
FIG. 6-6
FIG. 6-7
FIG. 6-8
FIG. 6-9
FIG. 6-10
FIG. 6-11
FIG. 6-12
FIG. 6-13
FIG. 6-14
FIG. 6-15
FIG. 6-16
FIG. 6-17
FIG. 6-18
FIG. 6-19
FIG. 6-20
FIG. 6-21
FIG. 6-22
FIG. 6-23
FIG. 6-24
FIG. 6-25
FIG. 6-26
FIG. 6-27
FIG. 6-28
FIG. 6-29
FIG. 6-30
FIG. 6-31
FIG. 6-32
FIG. 6-33
FIG. 6-34
FIG. 6-35
FIG. 6-36
FIG. 6-37
FIG. 6-38
FIG. 6-39
FIG. 6-40
FIG. 6-41
FIG. 6-42
FIG. 6-43
FIG. 6-44
FIG. 6-45
FIG. 6-46
FIG. 6-47
FIG. 6-48
FIG. 6-49
FIG. 6-50
FIG. 6-51
CONFIGURATION - MAPPING SETUP 2 - - - - - - - CONTROL PULL DOWN MENU/SELECTING FAST FILL
SELECTING FAST FILL SOURCE - - - - - - - - - - MAPPING IS COMPLETE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAPPED FAST FILL TO OUTPUT RELAY #1 - - - - DESTINATIONS/SELECTING OK TO FILL - - - - - - OK TO FILL (HO1.4) SELECTED AS A DESTINATION CONFIGURATION - MAPPING SETUP #2 PAGE/
SELECTING LOCAL INPUT #4 AS THE SOURCE - - COMPLETED ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT - - - - - MAPPING SETUP #1 PAGE/SELECTING OUTPUT
RELAY #3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUTPUT RELAY #3 (HO0.2) ENTERED IN THE
ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT AS A DESTINATION - - ALARMS/SELECTING OVERFILL ALARM - - - - - - OVERFILL ALARM (HI3.13) ENTERED IN THE
MAPPING ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT - - - - - - - ADDING BOOLEAN “OR” TO THE ASSIGNMENT
STATEMENT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ALARMS/SELECTING SLOW GATE SHUT ALARM - SLOW GATE SHUT (HI3.15) ADDED AS THE SECOND
SOURCE TO THE ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT - - - MULTIPLE SOURCE MAP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NETWORK/SELECTING DEVICENET INT OUT- - - - DEVICENET INT OUT (DIO2) SET AS DESTINATION PROCESS DATA/SELECTING GROSS WEIGHT - - - ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT MAPPING GROSS
WEIGHT (HF12) TO DEVICENET INT OUT (DIO2) - LOCAL OUTPUT/SELECTING OUTPUT RELAY #2 - OUTPUT RELAY #2 (HO0.1) SET AS DESTINATION - NETWORK/SELECTING DEVICENET BOOLEAN IN - NETWORK/SELECTING NON-BOOLEAN DEVICENET
INT IN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT MAPPING DEVICENET
BOOLEAN IN (DI2.1) TO OUTPUT RELAY #2 (HO0.1) ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT MAPPING DEVICENET
INT IN (DIO2) TO OUTPUT RELAY #2 (HO0.1) - - - DEVICENET BOOLEAN IN MAPPED TO OUTPUT
RELAY #2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HIGHLIGHTING CURRENT MAPPING - - - - - - - - COPY TO THE MAP TEXT FIELD - - - - - - - - - - REMOVING MAPPING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INPUT FUNCTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OUTPUT FUNCTION - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MAPPING THE FAST FILL TO OUTPUT RELAY #1 - DEVICENET OUTPUT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DEVICENET OUTPUT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - HARDY CONTROL LINK NETWORK MAPPING - - - CONFIGURATION MENU/I/O MAPPING - - - - - - - BASIC I/O MAPPING/OK TO FILL SELECTION - - - OK TO FILL MENU/ITEM NOT MAPPED - - - - - - - ITEM SELECTION MENU/NOT MAPPED SELECTED ITEM SELECTION MENU/INPUT 1 SELECTED - - - OK TO FILL MENU/INPUT 1 MAPPED - - - - - - - - OK TO FILL/SOURCE MAPPED - - - - - - - - - - - OK TO FILL MAP INDICATION - - - - - - - - - - - - OK TO FILL MENU/INPUT 1 MAPPED - - - - - - - - -
-
-
67
68
68
68
69
69
69
- - 69
- - 69
- - 70
- - 70
- - 70
- - 70
- - 70
- - 70
-
-
71
71
71
71
71
-
-
71
72
72
72
- - 72
- - 72
- - 72
-
-
72
73
73
73
74
74
75
76
76
77
81
81
81
81
81
82
82
82
82
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 6-52
FIG. 6-53
FIG. 6-54
FIG. 6-55
Chapter 7
ITEM SELECTION/SELECTING NOT MAPPED - OK TO FILL MENU/ITEM UNMAPPED - - - - - - BASIC I/O MAPPING/OK TO FILL UNMAPPED - - HARDY CONTROL-LINK NETWORK CONNECTED
TO A CONTROLNET/DEVICENET/PROFIBUS
NETWORK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - 82
- - - - 82
- - - - 82
- - - - 83
Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85
FIG. 7-1
FIG. 7-2
FIG. 7-3
FIG. 7-4
FIG. 7-5
FIG. 7-6
FIG. 7-7
FIG. 7-8
FIG. 7-9
FIG. 7-10
FIG. 7-11
FIG. 7-12
FIG. 7-13
FIG. 7-14
FIG. 7-15
FIG. 7-16
FIG. 7-17
FIG. 7-18
FIG. 7-19
FIG. 7-20
FIG. 7-21
FIG. 7-22
FIG. 7-23
FIG. 7-24
FIG. 7-25
FIG. 7-26
FIG. 7-27
FIG. 7-28
FIG. 7-29
FIG. 7-30
FIG. 7-31
FIG. 7-32
FIG. 7-33
FIG. 7-34
FIG. 7-35
FIG. 7-36
FIG. 7-37
FIG. 7-38
FIG. 7-39
FIG. 7-40
FIG. 7-41
FIG. 7-42
FIG. 7-43
FIG. 7-44
FIG. 7-45
FIG. 7-46
FIG. 7-47
NOT OK TO FILL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOST OK TO FILL ALARM/FAST FILL - - - - - - - - - LOST OK TO FILL ALARM/SLOW FILL - - - - - - - - - FAST FILL GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM - - - - - - - RESUME FILLING FAST DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - FAST GATE DID NOT CLOSE - - - - - - - - - - - - - RESUME FILLING FAST DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - SLOW GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM - - - - - - - - - RESUME FILLING SLOW - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SLOW GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM - - - - - - - - WAIT TIMER DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WAIT DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UNDERFILL ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OVERFILL ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ACCEPT FILL DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OVER REFILL ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - REFILL TIME-OUT ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DISPENSE STANDBY DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - NOT OK TO DISPENSE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOST OK TO DISPENSE ALARM/FAST DISPENSE - - LOST OK TO DISPENSE ALARM/SLOW DISPENSE - - FAST DISPENSE GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM - - - RESUME DISPENSING FAST DISPLAY - - - - - - - - FAST DISPENSE ON - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FAST GATE DID NOT CLOSE - - - - - - - - - - - - - RESUME DISPENSE? DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - SLOW GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM - - - - - - - - - WAIT DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SLOW GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM - - - - - - - - WAIT DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - UNDERDISPENSE ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - OVERDISPENSE ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ACCEPT DISPENSE DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - CHANGE IBC ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JOG GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM - - - - - - - - - - TO JOG AGAIN PRESS START DISPLAY - - - - - - - JOG GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM - - - - - - - - - JOG 1 DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JOG DISPLAY/JOG 1 2.0 SECONDS - - - - - - - - - - JOG DISPLAY/COMPLETED ONE JOG SEQUENCE
CHECKING WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JOG PAUSED 1.0 SECOND INTO THE JOG SEQUENCE
JOG COUNT ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - JOG DISPLAY/JOG AGAIN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOT OK TO DISCHARGE ALARM - - - - - - - - - - - DISCHARGE GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM - - - - - - CLOGGED DISCHARGE GATE ALARM - - - - - - - - DISCHARGE GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM - - - - - -
- 85
- 86
- 86
- 86
- 86
- 86
- 87
- 87
- 87
- 87
- 87
- 88
- 88
- 88
- 88
- 88
- 89
- 89
- 89
- 89
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 90
- 91
- 91
- 91
- 91
- 91
- 91
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 92
- 93
- 93
- 93
- 93
- 93
- 93
- 94
- 94
- 94
- 94
VI
VII
Table of Illustrations
FIG. 7-48 TEST AND DATA MENU/SELECTING DEVICE DATA LIST - 114
FIG. 7-49 TEST DATA DISPLAY/INSTRUMENT ID - MODEL
NUMBER - S/N - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 114
FIG. 7-50 TEST DATA DISPLAY/PROGRAM VERSION/LAST
CAL TYPE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 114
FIG. 7-51 TEST DATA/LAST CALIBRATION TIME - - - - - - - - - - 115
FIG. 7-52 TEST DATA/LAST CALIBRATION DAY/MONTH/YEAR - - - 115
FIG. 7-53 TEST DISPLAY/CALIBRATOR - UNITS - WAVERSAVER® - 115
FIG. 7-54 TEST DATA DISPLAY/GRADUATION SIZE - SPAN
VALUE - ZERO COUNT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 115
FIG. 7-55 TEST DATA DISPLAY/SPAN COUNT - C2 SENSITIVITY SCALE CAPACITY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 116
FIG. 7-56 TEST DATA DISPLAY/ZERO TOLERANCE - AUTO
ZERO TOLERANCE - AUTO ZERO TIME - - - - - - - - - 116
FIG. 7-57 TEST DATA DISPLAY/TARE LIMIT - MOTION
TOLERANCE - AVERAGES - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 117
FIG. 7-58 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/INGREDIENT FILL CYCLES - TARGET WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - 117
FIG. 7-59 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/TARGET
PREACT - SMART PREACT - TARGET WINDOW (WT+) - 118
FIG. 7-60 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/TARGET WINDOW
(WT-) - TARGET WINDOW (WT%+) -TARGET WINDOW
(WT%-) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 118
FIG. 7-61 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/JOG ON TIME JOG COUNT - JOG OFF TIME - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 118
FIG. 7-62 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/FILL TIMER WAIT TIMER - SPEED - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 118
FIG. 7-63 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/FAST FILL
PROOF SWITCH - FAST FILL PROOF TIMER FAST FILL WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 119
FIG. 7-64 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/AUTO FAST
ADJUST - MODE - SLOW FILL PROOF SWITCH - - - - - 119
FIG. 7-65 TEST DATA DISPLAY/SLOW FILL PROOF TIMER PRT BAUD RATE - PORT PARITY - - - - - - - - - - - - 119
FIG. 7-66 TEST DATA DISPLAY/PRINTER DATA BITS NUMBER OF LOAD SENSORS - LOAD SENSOR - - - - - 119
FIG. 7-67 LOAD SENSOR DISPLAY/SERIAL NUMBER CAPACITY - SENSITIVITY (MV/V) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 120
FIG. 7-68 SENSITIVITY - INPUT RESISTANCE - OUTPUT
RESISTANCE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 120
FIG. 7-69 TEST DATA DISPLAY/LOAD SENSOR - IP ADDRESS DEVICENET ADR - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 120
FIG. 7-70 TEST AND DATA MENU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 120
FIG. 7-71 TEST AND DATA MENU/SELECTING DIAGNOSTICS - - - 121
FIG. 7-72 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING VOLTAGE &
WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 121
FIG. 7-73 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/CHOOSE DISPLAY SCREEN - - 121
FIG. 7-74 MILLIVOL.T AND WEIGHT READING - - - - - - - - - - - 121
FIG. 7-75 MILLIVOLT/VOLT AND WEIGHT READING - - - - - - - - 121
FIG. 7-76 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING STABILITY TEST - - 122
FIG. 7-77 STABILITY TEST DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 122
FIG. 7-78 SYSTEM STABILITY TEST DISPLAY/PASS - - - - - - - - 122
FIG. 7-79 SYSTEM STABILITY TEST DISPLAY/FAIL - - - - - - - - - 122
FIG. 7-80 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/FACTORY DEFAULTS - - - - - - 123
FIG. 7-81 FACTORY DEFAULTS DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 123
FIG. 7-82 FUNCTION OK DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 123
FIG. 7-83 INSTRUMENT SELECTION DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - 123
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 7-84 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING RETURN TO
ZERO TEST - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 123
FIG. 7-85 RETURN TO ZERO TEST DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - 123
FIG. 7-86 RETURN TO ZERO TEST/PASS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 124
FIG. 7-87 RETURN TO ZERO/FAIL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 124
FIG. 7-88 DIAGNOSTICS/VIEW INPUT STATES - - - - - - - - - - - 124
FIG. 7-89 INPUT STATES DISPLAY/INPUT 2 AND 4 ACTIVE - - - - - 124
FIG. 7-90 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/FORCE OUTPUTS - - - - - - - - 124
FIG. 7-91 WARNING FOR FORCE OUTPUTS - - - - - - - - - - - - 124
FIG. 7-92 OUTPUT RELAY DISPLAY/SELECTING OUTPUT
RELAY #1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 125
FIG. 7-93 OUTPUT RELAY DISPLAY/SELECTING OUTPUT
RELAY #2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 125
FIG. 7-94 OUTPUT RELAY #1 FORCED CLOSED DISPLAY - - - - - 125
FIG. 7-95 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTION STATE
LOGGING - OFF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 125
FIG. 7-96 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/STATE LOGGING - ON - - - - - 125
FIG. 7-97 SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - 126
FIG. 7-98 OPERATION/DIAGNOSTICS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 126
FIG. 7-99 SET FACTORY DEFAULTS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 126
FIG. 7-100 FACTORY DEFAULTS SET/SELECT APPLICATION TYPE - 127
FIG. 7-101 TEST AND DATA MENU/SELECTING DIAGNOSTICS - - - 127
FIG. 7-102 SMART DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING
VOLTAGE & WEIGHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
FIG. 7-103 TOTAL MILLIVOLT READING - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 127
FIG. 7-104 INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL DISPLAY/MILLIVOLTS - - - - - - 128
FIG. 7-105 TOTAL MILLIVOLT/VOLT READING - - - - - - - - - - - - 128
FIG. 7-106 INDIVIDUAL MILLIVOLT/VOLT DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - 128
FIG. 7-107 SCALE WITH TOTALS/WEIGHT (LB) SELECTED - - - - - 128
FIG. 7-108 INDIVIDUAL WEIGHT DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 129
FIG. 7-109 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING STABILITY TEST - - 129
FIG. 7-110 STABILITY TEST DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 129
FIG. 7-111 STABILITY TEST/TESTING DISPLAY - - - - - - - - - - - 129
FIG. 7-112 SYSTEM STABILITY TEST DISPLAY/PASS - - - - - - - - 129
FIG. 7-113 TEST RESULTS PER CHANNEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 130
FIG. 7-114 TEST RESULTS FOR CHANNEL 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 130
FIG. 7-115 STABILITY TEST RESULTS/CHANNEL 3 FAILED - - - - - 130
FIG. 7-116 STABILITY TEST RESULTS/CHANNEL 3 MEAN
ADC COUNIS OUT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 130
FIG. 7-117 HOME PAGE/SELECTING OPERATION - - - - - - - - - - 131
FIG. 7-118 OPERATION - CHOOSE ONE/SELECTING
DIAGNOSTICS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 131
FIG. 7-119 OPERATION - SMART DIAGNOSTICS - - - - - - - - - - - 131
FIG. 7-120 OPERATION - SMART DIAGNOSTICS/ WEIGHT
AND VOLTAGE PAGE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 131
FIG. 7-121 TYPICAL LOAD CELL SYSTEM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 132
FIG. 7-122 SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133
VIII
1
CHAPTER 1
Overview
CHAPTER 1: OVERVIEW
General Introduction to the Hardy Filler/Dispenser/IBC HI 3010 Service Manual
This Service Manual provides installation, setup and troubleshooting procedures for the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC.
For information on network setup, optional cards, security,
and Email, see the HI 3000 Series Operation and Installation
Manual.
To get the maximum service life from this product, technicians should use this instrument in accordance with recommended practices either implied or expressed in this manual.
Before using the Filler/Dispenser/IBC all service personnel
should read and understand all cautions, warnings, and
safety procedures, referenced or explicitly stated in this manual, to insure the safe operation and repair of this instrument.
Hardy Instruments sincerely appreciates your business. We
encourage input about the performance and operation of our
products from our customers. Should you not understand any
information in this manual or experience any problems with
this product, please contact our Technical Support Department at:
Phone: (858) 278-2900
FAX: (858) 278-6700
E-Mail:
•
•
[email protected]
[email protected]
Or visit our web site at:
http://www.hardyinstruments.com
Our web site is full of useful information about our products,
process weighing and vibration analysis applications. You
can also update the Filler/Dispenser/IBC Manual. The latest
revised manuals are available FREE in the Support Section
of our Web Site. While you’re on the site feel free to visit the
other web pages which can provide answers to your questions about, load points, process weighing, vibration analysis
or other Hardy instruments. Be sure to sign up for the Hardy
Newsletter to get the latest information on all Hardy products and services. For answers to technical issues and service
problems check the Hardy Web Tech on our Hardy Web Site.
Most problems can be resolved by the Hardy Web Tech, 365
days a year, 24 hours a day 7 days a week. You can still contact a technician by phone during our operating hours if necessary.
Description
The Hardy Instruments Filler/Dispenser/IBC controller is
part of a complete line of application specific process weighing and condition monitoring instruments. The Filler/Dispenser/IBC instrument is available as an HI 3010, a stand
alone controller with a display (4 lines; 20 characters) and
key pad or an HI 3010R, blind remote stand-alone controller,
swivel mounted with no display. A remote 6 digit, 7 segment
LED display is available as an option for the HI 3010R. The
Filler/Dispenser controller has built-in totalizers that keep
you up to date as to the following:
•
History of Totals for each of the twelve
(12) internally stored material configurations include:
1.
2.
Number of Cycles
Amount of material in a cycle
The HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC is designed with output
alarms, for example:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Over Fills/Under Fills
Feed Time-outs
Out of Tolerance
Not OK to Fill
Too Many Jogs
Discharge gate is not responding
Change an Immediate Bulk container
The HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC is field configurable for
filling, dispensing and IBC (Intermediate Bulk Container)
applications. This instrument is a stand-alone controller with
fast and slow speeds and auto-adjusting preacts for precise,
rapid process control. Displays keep the user up to date as to
the number of cycles and amount of material in the cycle. In
addition the instrument maintains a history of the totals for
each of the twelve internally stored material configurations.
Output alarms warn the operator of overfills, feed time-outs,
out of zero tolerance, not OK to fill, too many jogs, if the
discharge gate is not responding or when to change an intermediate bulk container. The Filler/Dispenser/IBC contains
Hardy Instrument’s core features:
•
•
•
WAVERSAVER® - Eliminates the effects
of vibration on the scale.
C2® Electronic Calibration - Calibration
without test weights.
SMM (Secure Memory Module) - Memory for manual transfer of configuration
data to another HI 3010 instrument(s).
All of Hardy’s 3000 Series instrumentation is loaded with
standard features like a selectable 10/100 BaseT Ethernet
port and an embedded web server to link performance diagnostics and setup data to and from your local Intranet,
Extranet, VPN or via the Internet (World Wide Web). A standard Devicenet interface allows multiple applications to be
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
viewed and controlled from one display and allows 3rd party
I/O to be easily added to the system. Mapped I/O saves you
wiring costs by distributing the I/O where you need it at the
process or in the control room. The controllers act as “Masters” over Ethernet/IP and Devicenet communications while
optional interfaces for Allen-Bradley Remote I/O, Profibus
and Analog provide communications to PLC® and DCS systems. Hard copy records can be printed via a standard 232
simplex printer port to an external printer.
Fill Gate
Target Weight
NOTE:
PLC® is a registered trademark of the AllenBradley Corporation.
Built-in Smart Diagnostics (Knowledge base) learns how
your system operates and auto-tunes it for maximum
throughput to finish your process faster. Alarms alert you to
problems or potential problems that can affect your process.
The Filler/Dispenser/IBC has Internet Wizards that walk you
through the instrument set up while on board help files are
just a key press away.
Typical Applications
•
•
•
•
Filling a Vessel Using a Feeder - Filling is
the adding (gain-in-weight) of a material
into a container on a scale. (See Fig. 1-1)
Filling into a Vessel from another Vessel
(See Fig. 1-2)
Dispensing A Vessel Using a Feeder - Dispensing is the adding of a material by
(loss-in-weight) from a vessel on a scale to
a container which is off the scale. (See Fig.
1-3)
Dispensing from a vessel to another vessel. (See Fig. 1-4)
Load Point
Load Point
Discharge Gate
FIG. 1-2 FILLING INTO A VESSEL FROM
ANOTHER VESSEL
Refill
Gate
Refill Point
Initiates based on
difference between
Gross Weight (Product
in bin) and Target
Weight.
Feeder
(Fast & Slow Speed)
Scale
Load Points
Refill
Gate
Target Weight
High Level (Prox)
Feeder
(Fast & Slow Speed)
Low Level (Prox)
Discharge Gate
FIG. 1-3 DISPENSING INTO A VESSEL FROM A
FEEDER
Scale
Load Points
FIG. 1-1 FILLING A VESSEL USING A FEEDER
2
3
CHAPTER 1
Overview
are important and will help us shape the future direction of
our products.
Load Point
Load Point
Connectivity
All HI 3000 Series products enable the user to use the selectable 10/100 base T Ethernet port or use its embedded web
server to link performance, diagnostics and setup data to and
from your intranet, extranet, VPN or the internet. Receive
alarms via e-mail or over WAP enabled devices including
cellular phones. A DeviceNet interface allows multiple
applications to be viewed and controlled from a display and
additional 3rd party I/O to be easily added to the filling/dispensing system. The controller has a single RS-232 serial
port configured as a printer port.
Dispense Gate
Target Weight
Setup Wizards
Discharge Gate
Setup Wizards enable the user to walk through the instrument set up. On-board Help files are just a key press or click
away.
Mapped I/O
FIG. 1-4 DISPENSING (LOSS-IN-WEIGHT) FROM A
VESSEL TO ANOTHER VESSEL
Hardy Web Tech
Mapped I/O saves wiring costs by distributing the I/O where
you need it, at the process or in the control room. The controller is a DeviceNet Scanner and the DeviceNet Scan table
is configured using RS Networx®. Optional interfaces for
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O, Profibus and Analog provide
communications to PLC and DCS systems.
WAVERSAVER®
We have implemented Hardy Web Tech, our new Online
Tech Support Knowledge Base, to serve your tech support
needs better than ever before. Hardy Web Tech helps you
immediately find answers to your technical questions. Just
type in your question and see if your answer exists in our
knowledgebase, which is populated by interactions with customers like you.
You can also create your personalized support page, and
your own support section that you can access 24/7. You can
even view and update your entire call history, as well as
maintain your profile containing your product and system
information, so we can more effectively meet your needs.
Last, but not least, we invite all user feedback. Click on the
"Provide Feedback" link to let us know how we're doing!
What do you like about the product? What's missing? How
do you like our new support site? Anything! Your comments
Typically, mechanical noise (from other machinery in a plant
environment) is present in forces larger than the weight
forces trying to be detected. The HI 3010 is fitted with
WAVERSAVER® technology which eliminates the effects of
vibratory forces present in all industrial weight control and
measurement applications. By eliminating the factor of
vibratory forces the controller is capable of identifying the
actual weight data. WAVERSAVER® can be configured
from the front panel to ignore noise with frequencies as low
as 0.25 Hz. One of four higher additional cut off frequencies
may be selected to provide a faster instrument response time.
The default factory configuration is 0.50 Hz vibration frequency immunity.
C2® Calibration
C2® Second Generation Calibration enables a scale system
to be calibrated electronically without using certified test
weights which equals the systems load capacity. A C2
weighing system consists of up to eight load sensors, a junction box, interconnect cable and an instrument with C2 capabilities, such as the Filler/Dispenser/IBC. All Hardy
Instruments C2 certified load sensors contain digital information detailing its unique performance characteristics. The
Hardy Filler/Dispenser/IBC reads the performance charac-
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
teristics of each individual load sensor and detects the quantity of load sensors in the system. Calibration is performed
by simply adding a reference point from the front panel or
via the Web Server. The reference can be zero (no weight on
the scale) or alternatively, a known weight on the scale. The
instrument is capable of performing traditional calibration
such as with the use of certified test weights.
NOTE:
WAVERSAVER® and C2® are registered trademarks of Hardy Instruments Inc.
On-Board Diagnostics
The HI 3010 has a built in diagnostics utility which enables
the operator to rapidly troubleshoot a weighing system from
the front panel of the controller or via the Web Server. Simply press the Test button and scroll through several tests that
will furnish the current state of each of the parameters that
concern your application and the weigh system. Help is just
a click away in the event you should not understand the
information on the display or need a description of the
parameter.
Secure Memory Module (SMM)
The Secure Memory Module stores critical configuration (up
to 12 material configurations), calibration and setup data of
the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC, thereby protecting this
information from corruption. During system operation when
a new parameter is entered, the SMM automatically updates
the value in its memory. Data stored in one HI 3010 can be
restored in another HI 3010 by physically transferring the
SMM to the new instrument. The SMM is conveniently
accessible from the instruments rear panel.
Relays
The HI 3010 has four standard AC solid-state electronic
relays that can be used to open or close valves or gates or
turn motors, mixers, vibration equipment, heaters, coolers,
etc. on or off
-PB
Profibus interface allows instrument capabilities to be communicated remotely to and from a Siemens or other Profibus
compatible processor.
-AC
AC input power for the HI 3000 Series remote mount instrument to act as a booster power supply for multiple instruments on Devicenet.
-RIO
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O interface allows full instrument
capabilities to be communicated remotely to and from an
Allen-Bradley processor.
Smart Diagnostics (-SD)
Smart Diagnostics consists of a daughter card (See Fig. 1-5)
and rear panel that is attached to the main board in all instruments. The Smart Diagnostics card enables the user to attach
three (3) additional load cells to the HI 3000 Series instrument for a total of four. This option enables the user to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Read individual C2 load Sensor certification data
Perform a Stability Test
Display load sensor weight and voltage
readings from the front panel and web
Perform a return to Zero test
Set Factory Defaults
From the Front Panel or Web Page, turn
On/Off individual load sensors and displays individual weights, mV/V (millivolts/volt) and mV (millivolts).
To get price and availability for the Smart Diagnostics
option, contact your local Hardy Representative or the Hardy
Service Center.
Serial Port
One standard RS 232 serial port which can be configured to
transmit weight data to a serial printer. Baud rates are user
selectable at 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19,200.
SMARTDIAGNOSTICS PWA
0535-0502REV
SN
OPTION
Options
-JB
Enables the instrument to sum four load sensor inputs to act
as a built-in summing box.
HI 3000-RC
Rear cap for the HI 3000 Series controllers. Upgrades the
entire assembly to a NEMA 4X rating by enclosing all the
rear panel connectors.
4
FIG. 1-5 SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD
5
CHAPTER 1
Overview
Hardware
If you are retrofitting Smart Diagnostics to an existing system you should receive:
Protocol) is also used in conjunction with the Ethernet network. UDP/IP provides fast, efficient data transport required
for real-time data exchange.
MOD-Bus/TPC/IP
•
•
•
Smart Diagnostics Card
Rear Plate with three additional ports
Fasteners to connect the rear plate to the
Main Board and to the rear of the chassis.
Rear Panel for Smart Diagnostics card
(See Fig. 2)
Installation and Operation Manual
4 standoffs
•
•
•
NOTE:
Smart Diagnostics does not require a junction
box.
TCP/IP is the common transport protocol of the Internet and
is actually a set of layered protocols, providing a reliable
data transport mechanism between machines. Ethernet has
become the de facto standard of corporate enterprise systems
and it has also become the de facto standard for factory networking. Ethernet has matured to the point that the cost of
implementing this network solution has been dropping to
where its cost is commensurate with those of today's fieldbuses. Using Ethernet TCP/IP in the factory allows true integration with the corporate Intranet and MES systems that
support your factory.
+Exc
+Sen-
+Sig
-Sig
-Sen
-Exc
+C2
-C2
Shield
+Exc
Neu
Channel 4
LINK
Line
+Sen-
+Sig
-Sig
-Sen
V+
Txd
Rxd
Gnd
Iso
Gnd
+Exc
+Sen-
Channel 3
+Sig
-Sig
-Sen
-Exc
+C2
-C2
Shield
Channel 2
-Exc
+C2
-C2
Shield
+Exc
+Sen-
+Sig
-Sig
-Sen
-Exc
+C2
-C2
Shield
OPC
T/R
Channel 1
Printer/Display
Ethernet
SMM
Devicenet
FIG. 1-6 SMART DIAGNOSTICS REAR PANEL
-MB
Stainless steel wall mount swivel bracket/stand for wall or
desktop mounting.
Communication Options
NOTE:
For Installation, Configuration and Setup please
refer to the HI 3000 Operation and Installation
Manual, Cabling and Networks Sections.
EtherNet/IP™
EtherNet/IP, short for Ethernet Industrial Protocol, is an
open industrial networking standard that takes advantage of
commercial, off-the-shelf Ethernet communication chips and
media. Ethernet technology, enables the user to access
device-level data from the Internet.The Ethernet/IP networking standard supports both implicit messaging (real-time I/O
messaging) and explicit messaging (message exchange).
EtherNet/IP is an open network that takes advantage of
commercial technology that already exists.
TCP/IP is the transport and network layer protocol of the
Internet and is commonly linked with all Ethernet installations and the business world. TCP/IP provides a set of services that any two devices can use to share data. Because
Ethernet technology and standard protocol suites such as
TCP/IP have been published for public use, standardized
software tools and physical media have been mass-produced
and are readily available, offering you the benefits of known
technology and accessibility. The UDP/IP (User Datagram
OLE for Process Control (OPC) enables an HI 3000 module
to communicate with any device that supports OLE/COM.
The architecture is designed to utilize the Microsoft distributed OLE technology (DCOM) to facilitate clients interfacing to remote servers.
Remote I/O (RIO) Interface to the Allen Bradley Network
The RIO port allows bi-directional communications with
Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and
Small Logic Controllers (SLC). The HI 3010 represents a
selectable 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 or full rack of discrete I/O (32 bits in
the Logic Controllers output and input image files) to the
PLC Controller and supports both discrete and block transfers of data. It can support up to 230.4 Kbaud transfer rates.
Profibus
Allows bi-directional communications to Profibus (Process
Fieldbus) products including those made by Siemens, GE
Fanuc and Texas Instruments. This interface supports PROFIBUS-DP (Decentralized Periphery) and processes both
Selectable Predetermined and Block transfer commands. It
supports up to 12 Mbaud transfer rates.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
6
7
CHAPTER 2
Specifications
CHAPTER 2: SPECIFICATIONS
About Chapter 2
Chapter 2 lists the specifications for the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser. Specifications are listed for the standard instrument
and for instruments fitted with optional equipment. The
specifications listed are designed to assist in the installation,
operation and troubleshooting of the instrument. Service personnel should be familiar with this section before attempting
an installation or repair of the instrument.
Specifications for a Standard Instrument
•
55 updates per second
•
•
•
•
•
Displayed: 1:985,000 (3 mV/V load cells)
Internal 1:1,048,5761
Excitation Voltage:
•
•
5 VDC
Drives up to 8 350 ohm load cells
•
1 to 250 - Sliding, User Selectable in Single Unit Increments
Wire Size: 12 AWG Maximum
Maximum Switch Current: .5 Amps
Maximum Switch Voltage: .5 Amps @ 60
VDC
Switch Voltage: 5-60 VDC
1 second surge: 5 Amps
Non-Linearity:
•
Resolution:
Maximum Switch Power: 120 Watts
Maximum Switch Voltage: .5 Amps @
240 VAC
Single Cycle Surge: 85 Amps (Peak)
Standard Electronic DC Relays:
•
•
Update Rate:
•
•
•
0.0015% of Full Scale
WAVERSAVER®:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Off
7.5 Hz
3.5 Hz
1.0 Hz
0.5 Hz
0.25 Hz
Averages:
Calibration Techniques:
Input:
•
•
Up to eight (8) 350 ohm Full Wheatstone
Bridge, Strain Gauge Load Sensors/Cells
(5 volt excitation) on one vessel.
Signal Voltage Range ± 0-120mV/V (±
600 mV)
Display:
•
•
C2® - Second Generation: Electronic
Traditional - Calibration with test weights
Standard Interfaces:
•
•
•
Ethernet - 10/100 Base T; embedded
server
DeviceNet - Master Scanner
Serial RS 232 - simplex to Printer.
Excitation Monitor:
•
•
4 line x 20 character backlit LCD
5 x 7 dot matrix
Display Increments (Graduations):
•
•
1,2,5,10,20,50,100,200,500 user selectable
Corresponding weight is dependent on the
decimal point location.
Standard Electronic AC Relays:
•
•
Wire Size: 12 AWG Maximum
Maximum Switch Current: .5 Amps
•
Current less than 10%
Power and Utility Requirements:
Voltage - Universal Power Supply (50/60 Hz)
•
•
120-240 VAC ± 10%
12 - 24 VDC
Frequency
•
47-63 Hz
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
8
Case Dimensions
Power:
•
•
10 Watts maximum with options
6.125"H x 8.56"W x 6.03"D (155.57mmH
x 217.42mmW x 1.53.16mmD)
Watts available for DeviceNet Power:
Front Panel Dimensions
•
15 Watts
•
Common Mode Voltage Range
•
7.686" H x 9.40" W x 0.625" D
(195.22mm H x 247.39mm W x
15.87mmD)
± 2.5 VDC
Panel Cutout Dimensions
Common Mode Rejection:
•
•
100dB @ 50-60Hz
Environmental Requirements:
Case Material
Operating Temperature Range:
•
6.75" H x 8.94" W (1775mm H x 227mm
W)
•
GE Cycolac Type KJW - Flame Retardant
ABS (Acrylanitrile Butadiene Styrene)
•
4.6 pounds (2.1 Kilograms)
•
Front Panel NEMA 4 Seal
-10º to 50º C (14º to 122º F)
Weight
Storage Temperature Range:
•
-20º to70º C (-4º to 158º F)
Rating
Temperature Coefficient:
•
Less than 0.005% of full scale per degree
C for zero and span.
Wall Mount (HI 3010-MB)
Humidity Range:
Base Dimensions
•
•
0-90% (non-condensing)
9.3” L x 4.0” W (236.22mm L x
101.60mm W)
Approvals:
•
•
•
CE
UL
CUL
Instrument Local I/O:
•
•
•
5 mappable inputs optically isolated
4 mappable outputs 48-240 VAC Form A
Electronic
3rd party mappable over DeviceNet
Overall Height with HI 3010 installed, as measured
from the base to the top of the front plate.
•
11.77” High (298.96mm H)
Swivel Material
•
304 Stainless Steel
Specifications for I/O Option Boards
Profibus Option Board
Physical Characteristics:
Power Supply:
Panel Mount (Model # HI 3010-PM)
•
+5V max - 350mA
Depth
Operating Temperature:
•
8.03" (203.96mm) Back of the Bezel to
rear cable clearance.
•
0 - 70° C (32° - 158° F)
9
CHAPTER 2
Specifications
•
Profibus Services:
•
DP Services
Max I/O Data Capacity:
•
•
•
•
ID Number and GSD Support:
•
57.6, 115, 225 Kbit/second
1003H with Standard GSD File (May
change if required)
Input - 63 bytes (Full Rack)
Output - 63 bytes (Full Rack)
15 Bytes Discrete
48 Bytes Block
RIO Supported Features:
Input Size:
•
•
•
•
0-122 Words
Output Size:
•
0-122 Words
Block Transfer Data
IO Mode
1/4, 1/2, 3/4 and Full Rack
Control of the Rack_Size and Starting_Quarter Combinations
Combined Input and Output Size:
•
Not exceed 208 Words
Starting Quarter
ControlNet Option Board
Valid Rack Sizes
First
For all Rack Sizes
Second
For 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 Racks
Third
For 1/4, 1/2 Racks
Fourth
Only for 1/4 Racks
Power Supply:
•
+5V max - 350mA
Operating Temperature:
•
0 - 70° C (32° - 158° F)
ControlNet Baud Rate:
•
5 Mbit/second
Table 1: Quarter Combinations
EtherNet/IP™ Option Card
Power Supply:
•
Max I/O Data Capacity:
•
•
Input - 250 bytes
Output - 250 bytes
ControlNet Supported Features:
•
•
Redundant Media
Cyclic Messaging
Operating Temperature:
•
RIO Baud Rate:
0 - 70° C (32° - 158° F)
•
10/100 Mbit/s
•
2048 bytes
•
2048 bytes
I/O Input:
I/O Output:
+5V max - 350mA
Operating Temperature:
•
•
Baud Rate:
RIO Option Board
Power Supply:
+5V max 450mA
0 - 70° C (32° - 158° F)
Application Interface:
•
Parallel
Specification Rel. 2:
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
EtherNet/IP level 2 I/O Server CIP (ControlNet & DeviceNet)
Functionality:
•
10/100Mbit MB/TCP +EtherNet/IP + IT
functions
Specifications for Peripherals/Systems
Components
HI 215JB-SS1 or PS1 Series:
Case Dimensions:
•
6.25"H x 6.25"W x 4.50D (158.75mmH x
158.75mmW x 114.3mmD)
•
5 pounds (2.27 Kilograms)
Weight
Enclosure Ratings
•
•
-SS1 Stainless Steel NEMA 4 & 4X
-PS1 Painted Carbon Steel NEMA 4
10
11
CHAPTER 3
Installation
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
About Chapter 3
All information contained in Chapter 3 pertains to unpacking, cabling, interconnecting and installing the HI 3010
Filler/Dispenser. Alternatives to any specifications contained
or implied in this section are not recommended. It is very
important that the user and service personnel be familiar
with the procedures contained in this chapter, before installing or operating the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser.
NOTE:
Ethernet and DeviceNet installation and setup
instructions are located in the HI 3000 Series
Operation and Installation Manual in the
Cabling Section. There are also installation
instructions in the Quick Installation Guide.
Disassembly and Reassembly Notes and
Cautions
•
WARNING: FAILURE TO DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD
BEFORE DISASSEMBLING MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
•
•
Unpacking
•
Step 1. Before signing the packing slip, inspect the packing
for damage of any kind.
Step 2. Report any damage to the carrier company immediately.
Step 3. Check to see that everything in the package
matches the bill of lading. You should normally
have:
•
HI 3010 Panel Mount
•
•
•
•
(1) HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser with mating
connectors and ordered options installed.
(1) Mounting Kit with a mounting bracket,
gasket and (4) RAF 8-32 captive screws.
CD containing User Guide and Service Manuals
Step 4. If any items are missing, damaged, or there are any
questions, please contact Customer Support at:
•
•
•
Hardy Instruments
9440 Carroll Park Drive, Suite 150
San Diego, CA 92121
•
Phone: (858) 278-2900
FAX: (858) 278-6700
Web Site: http//www.hardyinstruments.com
E-Mail: [email protected]
Step 5. Record the model number and serial number of the
Weight Controller. Store in a convenient, secure
location for reference when contacting Hardy
Instruments Customer Service Department or to
buy parts or firmware upgrades.
Always disconnect the power cord before
disassembling.
•
Make sure that any disassembly is done in
a clean, well ventilated, properly controlled static environment.
Always make sure that the assemblies and
sub-assemblies are well supported and
insulated when doing any repairs on the
instrument.
Place small fasteners, connectors and electrical parts in closed containers so as not to
lose parts during reassembly.
Read all the disassembly instructions
before any disassembly begins. Be sure
that you are familiar with the procedures.
If any of the instructions for disassembly
are unclear, contact Hardy Instruments,
Technical Support Department for additional information and assistance.
Do not disconnect any electrical plug, connector or terminal unless an identification
tag is present or one is attached. Always
note where the connector or plug was
attached to the electrical component or
wiring harness.
Always install complete hardware groups
(Screws, Washers, Lock Washers, Spacers,
Etc.) back to the original point of removal.
Always replace broken or damaged modules or hardware immediately!
Always check to be sure that no loose
parts are sitting on printed circuit boards
or electrical connectors or wires when disassembling or reassembling.
Always protect printed circuit boards from
electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always use
approved ESD wrist straps and anti-static
pads.
Always perform a final inspection after
completing any reassembly to be sure that
all fasteners are tight, all connectors are
secure and there are no loose parts on any
of the printed circuit boards in the instrument.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
WARNING:
Always follow proper safety procedures
when working on or around the instrument.
IF A LITHIUM BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH AN
•
•
12
8.94” ±.06 (227.076mm ± 1.52mm) Wide
6.625” ±.06 (168.26mm ± 1.52mm) High
8.94" (227.076)
INCORRECT TYPE IT MAY CAUSE AN EXPLOSION WHICH
WILL CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE OR PERSONAL INJURY.
Mechanical Installation
Installing the HI 3010 in a Panel
6.625" (168.26)
Panel Cutout Specifications
Enclosure Size Requirements:
•
•
Overall depth of the enclosure must be a
minimum of 8.5" to allow for the 2" clearance between the rear panel of the HI 3010
Filler/Dispenser and the inside surface of the
rear panel of the enclosure. (See Fig. 3-1)
There must be a 1" clearance completely
around the bezel and other installed units.
FIG. 3-2 PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS
Installing the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser
Step 1. Make sure that all Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
precautions are taken before and during installation.
Step 2. The Filler/Dispenser comes with a NEMA 4 & 4X
rated compression gasket. Slide the gasket over the
rear of the instrument until the gasket is flush with
the back side of the front panel. (See Fig. 3-3)
FIG. 3-3 PANEL MOUNT INSTALLATION
FIG. 3-1 REAR PANEL CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT
Dimensions of the panel cutout. (See Fig. 3-2)
Step 3. Gently slide the Filler/Dispenser with the gasket
into the cutout in the enclosure front panel or door
until the gasket is flush with the enclosure front
panel. (See Fig. 3-4) Be sure to secure the instrument with both hands when installing.
Step 4. Line up the instrument’s tapped holes with the
through holes in the enclosure front panel.
13
CHAPTER 3
Installation
CAUTION:
ONCE THE GASKET IS COMPRESSED IT
SHOULD NOT BE USED AGAIN. WHENEVER THE FILLER/DISPENSER IS REMOVED FROM THE PANEL, RE INSTALL WITH
A NEW GASKET.
convenient access to the front panel key board. The Swivel
Mount also serves as a wall mount. Simply rotate the swivel
mount 90 degrees and attach it to a wall. The swivel allows
the instrument to rotate several degrees, even with cables
and rear cover attached.
Step 1. Use four (4) 1/4 x 20 fasteners to fasten the swivel
mount to a horizontal surface. (See Fig. 3-5)
FIG. 3-5 INSTALLING THE SWIVEL MOUNT TO A
HORIZONTAL SURFACE
FIG. 3-4 NEMA 4 GASKET FLUSH AGAINST THE
FRONT PANEL OF THE ENCLOSURE
Step 5. Gently slide the Panel Mount Collar over the rear of
the instrument. (See Fig. 3-3)
Step 6. Push the captive screws through the holes in the
Enclosure Front Panel and install the screws into
the tapped holes on the instrument until the screws
are finger tight.
Step 7. Use a slotted head screwdriver and tighten each
screw until the instrument is snug and the compression gasket is tight against the Enclosure Front
Panel. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN!
Step 8. The Panel Mount installation is complete.
Installing the HI 3010 in a Swivel/Wall Mount
About the Swivel/Wall Mount
The swivel mounts allows the Filler/Dispenser to mount on a
horizontal or vertical surface. The instrument is mounted in
the swivel which is fastened to a hard surface. The mount not
only supports the instrument but also allows the Filler/Dispenser to rotate for a better view of the display and more
Step 2. Place the Filler/Dispenser between the Swivel
Mount brackets so that the threaded holes in the
instrument are aligned with the slots in the Swivel
bracket. (See Fig. 3-6)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
14
FIG. 3-6 FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLING IN A
SWIVEL MOUNT
Step 3. Screw the two (2) fastener knobs into the threaded
holes on each side of the Filler/Dispenser until the
brackets are snug against the instrument. (See Fig.
3-6 & 3-7)
FIG. 3-7 FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLED IN A
SWIVEL MOUNT
Step 7. Use four (4) 1/4 x 20 fasteners to fasten the swivel
mount to a vertical surface. (See Fig. 3-8)
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
Step 4. To rotate the instrument in the swivel mount, loosen
the two fastener knobs.
Step 5. Rotate the instrument to the position you want.
Step 6. Re-tighten the fastener knobs.
FIG. 3-8 INSTALLING THE SWIVEL MOUNT TO A
VERTICAL SURFACE
Step 8. Place the Filler/Dispenser between the Swivel
Mount brackets so that the threaded holes in the
instrument are aligned with the slots in the Swivel
bracket. (See Fig. 3-9)
15
CHAPTER 3
Installation
NOTE:
When wall mounted, the unit should support a 14
pound weight for one minute without coming
loose or damaging the equipment.
FIG. 3-9 FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLING IN A
SWIVEL WALL MOUNT
Step 9. Screw the two fastener knobs into the threaded
holes on each side of the Filler/Dispenser until the
brackets are snug against the instrument. (See Figs.
3-9 & 3-10)
Installing Printed Circuit Boards
Step 1. From the back of the instrument, align the PCB
board with the housing slots in the instrument so
that the backplane connector is facing the instrument. (See Fig. 3-11)
FIG. 3-11 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD INSTALLATION/LINING UP BOARDS WITH THE SLOTS
Step 2. Gently slide the circuit board into the slots making
sure that the each side of the PC board is in the
proper slot. (See Fig. 3-12)
FIG. 3-12 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD INSTALLATION/SLIDING THE BOARD INTO THE INSTRUMENT
FIG. 3-10 FILLER/DISPENSER INSTALLED IN A
SWIVEL/WALL MOUNT
Step 3. Gently push the PC board all the way into the
instrument until the backplane connector is connected to the backplane.
Step 4. Install the Main Board rear plate. (See Fig. 3-13)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
•
•
•
Place the Main Board rear plate so that the
threaded holes on each side of the instrument
chassis are aligned.
Screw a panhead screw (#4-40) into the
threaded hole on the instrument chassis. Do
not tighten.
Screw the panhead screws that attach the
rear plate to the Main Board until they are
finger tight.
Use a Phillips head screw driver and tighten
all the installed screws until snug.
16
Phillips
Screws
Thumb
Screws
CAUTION: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.
FIG. 3-14 REAR PLATE FASTENERS
Step 6. Grasp the two thumb screws and gently pull the rear
plate and Main Board out of the instrument.
Step 7. Use a phillips head screw driver and remove the
three phillips screws that fasten the rear plate to the
Single Channel Main board.
Step 8. Remove the two thumb screws that fasten the rear
plate to the Single Channel Main board.
Step 9. Attach the four (4) 7/8” standoffs to the Smart
Diagnostics Card with the four (4) 1/4” phillips
screws. Tighten the screws until they are snug. Do
not overtighten. (See Fig. 3-15)
Step 10. With the Hardy Logo facing the back of the Main
board, line up the pins of the Smart Diagnostics
card with the connector on the Main board.
FIG. 3-13 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD
INSTALLED WITH REAR PLATE
NOTE:
Step 5. Installation of all the PC Boards used in any HI
3000 Series Instrument requires the same procedures.
Installing the Smart Diagnostics (-SD)
Card
NOTE:
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Step 4.
Make sure that none of the pins are bent before
installing.
C o n n e c to r P in s
to M a in B o a r d
SMART DIAGNOSTICS PWA
REV
SN
0535-0502-
OPTION
Install
Standoffs
Here
Install
Standoffs
Here
For Configuration Instructions go to Chapter 4 Options Configuration/Smart Diagnostics Configuration.
Unplug the power connector and cable.
Remove the Secure Memory Module.
Unplug the load cell connector and cable.
Disconnect all the communication cables connected
to the instrument.
Step 5. Use a phillips head screw driver and remove the
two phillips head screws that fasten the back plate
to the rear of the instrument chassis. (See Fig. 3-14)
FIG. 3-15 STANDOFF LOCATIONS
Step 11. Gently push the pins into the connector making sure
that the standoffs are aligned with the standoff holes
in the Main board. When the standoffs are flush
with the Main board.
Step 12. Use a phillips head screw driver and install the four
(4) phillips screws that fasten the main board to the
17
CHAPTER 3
Installation
four (4) standoffs. Tighten until snug, do not overtighten.
Step 13. Use a Phillips head screw driver and install the
three (3) phillips screws that fasten the Smart Diagnostics rear plate to the Main board.
Step 14. Install the two (2) thumb screws that fasten the
Smart Diagnostics rear plate to the Main board.
Step 15. Line the Smart Diagnostics Card and the Main
board with the guide slots on either side of the chassis.
Step 16. Gently slide the Smart Diagnostics assembly back
into the HI 3000 Series instrument.
Step 17. Install the two (2) phillips screws that fasten the
Smart Diagnostics rear plate to the chassis.
Step 18. Plug the Load Cell connectors into the Channel
inputs at the rear panel.
Step 19. Install the communication cables.
Step 20. Install the Secure Memory Module.
Installation complete.
NOTE:
•
•
•
•
Use a 6 inch service bend to relieve stress on
the connectors and to ease servicing the unit.
Make sure that all plugs are firmly in place.
Be sure to secure the power cord with the
two (2) captive screw-on clips.
All connections are made at the rear panel of
the Filler/Dispenser./IBC.
AC Power Wiring
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE WITH INCORRECT LINE
VOLTAGE. TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE
AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY. MAKE SURE THAT THE POWER
SOURCE DOES NOT EXCEED 240 VAC.
•
The AC power should be supplied by a “clean” primary
line, directly from the power panel. This line should not
supply any other equipment, including the feeding unit,
and should be supplied with a minimum 10 amp breaker.
(See Fig. 3-16)
For Configuration Instruction for Smart Diagnostics go to Chapter 4, Smart Diagnostics Configuration.
Removing Printed Circuit Boards
Step 1. Unplug all the cables that are connected to the
instrument.
Step 2. Use a Phillips head screw driver and remove the
two (2) pan head screws that fasten the rear plate to
the instrument. You do not need to remove any of
the screws that fasten the rear panel to the PC
Board.
Step 3. Use your fingers to grasp the two (2) (knurled
knobs) that are mounted on the rear panels.
Step 4. Gently pull the knobs away from the instrument
until the PC Board is clear of the instrument slots.
Step 5. Store the circuit board in a secure and dry location,
free of any ESD.
Electrical Installation
Cabling and Interconnecting
Recommended Installation Procedures
•
Carefully plan the cable runs and wiring connections before routing, cutting and trimming cables and wires.
CAUTION: INSTRUMENT POWER AND RELAY
WIRES SHOULD BE ROUTED AWAY FROM ALL
OTHER SIGNAL CABLES TO AVOID ELECTRICAL
INTERFERENCE.
•
All cabling should be neatly bundled, tied,
and dressed.
FIG. 3-16 POWER WIRING DIAGRAM
•
Power Input J1
J1-1 Neu (Low)
J1-2 Line (HI)
J1-3 Ground
Step 1. The HI 3000 Series instruments are configured with
a universal power supply rated from 120 to 240
VAC. The instruments can be powered by a 120 or
240 VAC power source and requires no switching
or jumper settings.
Step 2. Install a 3-wire, minimum 14 AWG power line to
the 3-pin terminal block connector. (See Fig. 3-16)
Step 3. The power and relay circuit card filters and conditions AC power. However, for noisy power lines,
external conditioning may be required.
-DC Power Wiring
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE WITH INCORRECT LINE
VOLTAGE. TO DO SO WILL RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE
AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY. MAKE SURE THAT THE POWER
SOURCE DOES NOT EXCEED 24 VDC.
•
The DC power should be supplied by a “clean” primary
line, directly from the DC power source.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
18
terminal block according to the cable color chart.
(See Below)
NOTE:
To purchase Hardy Load Cell cable, contact your
local Hardy Representative or Distributor.
Step 3. Plug the terminal block into the Channel 1 connector on the rear panel.
FIG. 3-17 DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
Step 1. Connect your positive and negative DC voltage
lines to the Phoenix connector that plugs into the
DeviceNet Connector. (See Fig. 3-17)
Step 2. Plug the connector into the DeviceNet Connector at
the rear panel.
NOTE:
Use DC power source when you have the -DC
option and do not have the DeviceNet Option.
The DeviceNet option has its own DC power
source.
Load Point Connections
FIG. 3-18 REAR PANEL/LOAD POINT CONNECTIONS
C2® Load Point Connection
Cable color Code for C2 Load Points (left to right facing the
rear panel):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Shield
C2C2+
EXCSENSIGSIG+
SEN+
EXC+
Ground Wire
Violet
Grey
Black
Brown
White
Green
BLUE
RED
Step 1. Remove the factory installed jumper from the terminal block if you are connecting an 8 wire cable
from the junction box.
Step 2. Connect the cable (Recommended load cell cable:
Hardy Instruments Prt. # 6020-0001) wires to the J9
Non-C2 Load Point Connection
Cable color Code for Non-C2 Load Points:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Shield
C2C2+
EXCSENSIGSIG+
SEN+
EXC+
Ground Wire
Not Used
Not Used
Black
Brown
White
Green
Blue
Red
Step 1. Remove the factory installed jumper from the terminal block if you have 6 wire load cell cable that
includes sense wires from the load cell or junction
box.
Step 2. Connect the cable (Recommended load cell cable:
Hardy Instruments Prt. # 6020-0001) wires to the J9
terminal block according to the Non-C2 cable color
chart.
Step 3. Plug the terminal block into the Channel 1 (J9) connector on the rear panel.
LVDT and Half Bridge Load Cells/Sensors
Please contact Hardy Technical Support for installation
instructions.
Junction Box Wiring
FIG. 3-19 JUNCTION BOX CONNECTIONS
Step 4. Connect the cable wires directly to the terminal
blocks according to the C2 or Non-C2 cable color
charts.
Step 5. Plug the terminal blocks into Channels 1 thru 4 connectors on the rear panel. Write down which load
cell is connected to Channel 1, Channel 2, Channel
3, Channel 4 for future reference.
19
CHAPTER 3
Installation
NOTE:
If you have one load point you must plug it into
Channel 1. If you have more than one load point
you must make sure that you plug one of the load
points into Channel 1.
Step 6. If you only have 3 load cells, do not use Channel 4.
know the type of instrument the SMM was taken
from.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE AN SMM WITH THE POWER
ON. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE POWER CABLE FROM THE
INSTRUMENT BEFORE REMOVING OR INSTALLING THE
SECURE MEMORY MODULE.
Installation of Secure Memory Module
(SMM)
FIG. 3-20 SECURE MEMORY MODULE (SMM)
Step 7. Slide the module with the notch up into the module
housing at the rear panel. (See Fig. 3-20 & 21)
FIG. 3-21 INSTALLING THE SECURE MEMORY
MODULE
Step 8. Press the module in until it stops. Do not force the
module, it should slide in easily.
Step 9. To remove the module pull the module straight out
of the housing. (See Fig. 3-21)
Transferring a Secure Memory Module
NOTE:
Make sure that when you move an SMM to
another instrument that you know what type of
instrument that will receive the SMM. For example if you accidently place a Dispenser into a previously configured Filler, the Filler changes into
a Dispenser and vice versa. Make sure that you
Step 1. Disconnect the power cable from the Instrument.
Step 2. Remove the Secure Memory Module from the
instrument.
Step 3. Install the Secure Memory Module into the new
instrument.
Step 4. Power up the new instrument.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
20
21
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURATION
About Chapter 4
Chapter 4 contains step-by-step instructions for configuring
the Hardy Instruments, HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC. The
procedures include complete instructions for configuring the
Filler/Dispenser from the Front Panel, DeviceNet and Web
Browser). We highly recommend reading the procedures
before configuring the Filler/Dispenser. For information on
network setup, optional cards, and Email, see the HI 3000
Series Operation and Installation Manual.
Configuring the Filler/Dispenser from the
Front Panel
Being familiar with the operating procedures insures that the
Filler/Dispenser will provide trouble free service. For the
best performance of the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser, any
instructions that are not contained in this manual (either
implicit or explicit) are not recommended. It is important to
note that the HI 3000 Series standard products do not require
any jumper or dip switch settings. Some of the communication option cards do have jumper settings, however.
FIG. 4-1 FRONT PANEL
Getting Started
Before configuring the Hardy HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser,
check to make sure the following procedures have been performed.
• Panel Mount and Blind Mount units properly
installed. (See chapter 3 - Installation)
• Power and Load Point cables properly installed
• Communication cables properly installed.
• All connectors securely fastened.
All the functions of the Filler/Dispenser operate the
same no matter what the interface. First let’s get
familiar with configuring the Filler/Dispenser from
the front panel of the instrument. (See Fig. 4-1)
Front Panel Display
The Front Panel Display is a 4 line x 20 Alphanumeric character LCD. The screen displays all the menus for Configuring, Calibrating and Operating the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser.
Button Functions
Start Button
The Stop button if pressed once will pause the filling or dispensing process. If the Stop Button is pressed twice it stops
the process and puts the Filler/Dispenser in a standby mode
which it will maintain until another button is pressed.
Help Button
Help Dialog
About the Help Dialog
The Help Button initiates the Help Dialog which displays a
Help message for the current Menu Item (the Menu Item in
front of the cursor) that is displayed.
As you move through the setup/configuration menus you
may on occasion need assistance. If you need help, do the
following:
Step 1. Use the up and down arrows and move the cursor in
front of the Menu Item you want help on.
Step 2. Press the Help button either on the front Panel and a
Help Dialog appears. The Help Dialog tells you
what the Menu Item is used for or other descriptive
information to help you enter the right parameters
for the current menu item.
Step 3. Push the clear button again to return to the current
menu.
Manual Button
Enables you to enter the manual mode of operation for the
following:
•
•
•
•
Tare Scale - Press Clear button to tare the instrument.
Discharge - Press the Start button to start a discharge.
Refill - Press the Start button to Start a refill.
Auxiliary Device - Press the Start button to start an
Auxiliary device.
• Fast Fill/Dispense - Press the Start button to start the
Fast Fill.
• Fill/Dispense - Press the Start button to start slow fill.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Enter Button
Print Button
The Print Button when pressed brings up a series of screens
(See Fig. 4-2) and allows the user to Print the following:
•
•
•
•
22
The Enter Button enters the alphanumeric value entered for a
menu item in the display. The Enter Button also enters the
selections from a pick list. (See Fig. 4-4)
Current Fill/Dispense
Current Cycle
Totals
Setup Data
Press the Print button, the following screen appears:
PRINT KEY MENU
> Pr int cur r ent Disp
Pr int Cur r ent Cycl e
Pr int Tot al s
FIG. 4-4 LIST SELECTION/ENTER BUTTON
For example, when selecting units from a pick list, use the
left and right arrows to move the cursor in front of the unit
you want and press the Enter button.
Exit Button
FIG. 4-2 PRINT SCREEN DEFAULT
Note that the cursor is in front of the Print Current Fill Menu.
that is the default setting. The print button will only print the
menu with a cursor in front of it. To move to another menu
press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in front of the
menu you want to print.
Up/Down - Left/Right Buttons
The Exit Button disregards the current value entry, restores
the previous value and moves the cursor to the last menu.
Clear Button
The Clear Button clears the total alphanumeric entry and
repositions the cursor for the first entry.
Ing./1 Button
Enables you to change the preprogrammed ingredient (1-12)
while in the Standby Mode. Also enters the integer 1 in the
display.
2/ABC Button
Enters the integer 2 in the display. Also enters the letters A,
B,C, in uppercase and a,b,c in lower case then the number 2.
NOTE:
FIG. 4-3 DIRECTIONAL BUTTONS
The Up/down arrow buttons move the cursor vertically
allowing the user to scroll through each item of a menu. The
Left/Right arrow buttons move the cursor horizontally left
and right. The Left arrow button has an added backspace
function. For example, if there are AlphaNumeric characters
that appear in the display, as you press the left arrow button
it erases the characters. The Right arrow button moves the
cursor to the right in the display and does not erase a alphanumeric entry. The Left/Right arrow buttons also move the
cursor through a pick list. (See Fig. 4-3)
Pushing the button once enters an uppercase A.
Pushing the button a second time enters an
uppercase B, third time a C. Push the button a
fourth time and a lowercase “a” is entered. Push
the button a fifth time and a lowercase “b” is
entered. When the button is pushed a seventh time
the number “2” is entered. You need to push the
buttons rapidly. If you delay too long the instrument accepts the alphanumeric character and
moves the cursor to the left preparing for the left
entry. If this happens, use the left arrow button to
erase the current entry and enter another character. This is true for all the alphanumeric buttons.
23
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Setup/3/DEF Button
This button enables you to access the configuration and
setup menus. Also enters the number 3 and the letters D, E,
F.
Amount/4/GHI
Enables you to change the amount of the ingredient while in
the standby mode. Also enters the number 4 and the letters
C, H, I.
Units/5/JKL Button
FIG. 4-5 WELCOME DISPLAY
Step 1. Press the Enter button. The Instrument Selection
screen displays. (See Fig. 4-6)
Enables you to change the units of measure (Lbs/Kg/oz/g)
while in the standby mode of operation. Also enters the integer 5 and the letters J, K, L.
6/MNO Button
Enters the integer 6 and the letters M, N, O.
Cycle/7/PQRS Button
Enables you to change the number of cycles (fills or dispenses) while in the standby mode. Also enters the integer 7
and letters P, Q, R, S.
8/TUV Button
Enters the integer 8 and the letters T, U, V.
FIG. 4-6 INSTRUMENT SELECTION SCREEN WITH
FILLER SELECTED (DEFAULT)
Step 2. To move the cursor up and down press the up and
down arrows until the cursor is in front of the
instrument you want to select.
Step 3. Press the Enter button. A prompt asking if you are
sure this is the instrument you want appears. (See
Fig. 4-7)
Test/9/WXYZ Button
Enables you to enter the selftest or diagnostics mode. Also
enters the integer 9 and letters W, X, Y, Z.
User/-/_/@/blank/,/. Button
Enables you to change the 3 digit user code while in the
standby mode. Also enters a dash (-) underscore (_) at (@),
comma (,) and period (.) symbols.
0/(/)/*/+/#/&/’ Button
Enables you to enter the left side of a parentheses (, enter the
right side of a parentheses), asterisk(*), plus sign (+), ampersand (&), apostrophe (‘) and the integer 0.
NOTE:
FIG. 4-7 PROMPT CONFIRMING SELECTION
Step 4. If this is the instrument you want to use, press the
Enter button. The Standby Display appears. (See
Fig. 4-8)
Whenever you see --> arrow in a menu it means
that there is a sub-menu that you need to go to in
order to set the parameters.
Selecting Configuration Menus
When the Filler/Dispenser first starts up, the function selection display appears. (See fig. 4-5)
FIG. 4-8 STANDBY DISPLAY
Step 5. Press the Setup/3/DEF button once. The Configuration Menu appears with the cursor in front of
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
“ADJUST INGREDIENT” (Default). (See Fig. 49)
FIG. 4-9 CONFIGURATION MENU/ADJUST
INGREDIENT
Configuring Ingredients from the Front Panel
About Configuring Ingredients
You can configure from 1 - 12 ingredients in the Filler/Dispenser. Each ingredient can be given an Ingredient Name,
Ingredient Number (1 thru 12), Set tolerance (Discrete or
Percent), Target Weight and Preact. You can also configure
the Gate Time, Jog On Time and several other parameters.
All these settings insure that each ingredient is exactly configured to deliver the exact amount of material for your filling or dispensing process.
Step 1. With the cursor in front of “ADJUST INGREDIENT”, Press the Enter button. The “ADJUST
INGREDIENT” sub-menu appears with the cursor
in front of Ingredient 1 (Default). (See Fig. 4-10)
24
Ingredient Name Parameter
FIG. 4-11 INGREDIENT 1 SUB-MENU/ENTER
INGREDIENT NAME
PARAMETER:INGREDIENT NAME
RANGE: 19 ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS
DEFAULT: INGREDIENT 1
Step 1. Press the Clear button to clear the existing ingredient name. (See Fig. 4-12)
FIG. 4-12 CLEARING INGREDIENT NAME
Step 2. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new
Ingredient Name. Remember you can only use 19
characters. In our example we entered Flour. (See
Fig. 4-13)
FIG. 4-10 ADJUST INGREDIENT SUB-MENU/
INGREDIENT #1
NOTE:
NOTE:
If you want to move to another ingredient, press
the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor is
in front of the ingredient you want to adjust.
Our example goes through configuring Ingredient #1, for illustration purposes, however setting
all the parameters for all 12 ingredients is
exactly the same.
Step 2. Press the Enter button. Ingredient 1 sub-menu
appears with the cursor in front of “Ingredient 1”.
(See Fig. 4-11) (Default)
FIG. 4-13 INGREDIENT NAME ENTERED/FLOUR
Step 3. Press the Enter button to select the entry. The entry
is selected and the cursor moves to the next item in
the menu. In this case it is the Fill Cycle. (See Fig.
4-14)
NOTE:
Another way to accept the entered parameter is
to use the down arrow. When you press the down
arrow after entering a parameter value the
instrument accepts that entry and moves the cursor to the next item on the menu.
25
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Parameter is set in another menu. In our example we set the
Target Weight to 100 lbs. (See Fig. 4-16)
Fill Cycles
About Fill/Dispense Cycles
Fill cycles are the number of fill/dispense cycles you are
going to use for this ingredient. In our example we are using
the ingredient Flour and we want “Flour” to cycle 15 times.
PARAMETER:TARGET WEIGHT
RANGE: .000001 - 999,999
DEFAULT: 1
Step 1. The cursor is in front of Target Weight. If you are
entering this parameter for the first time, use the
alphanumeric key pad and enter the target weight
for this ingredient. (See Fig. 4-16)
FIG. 4-14 INGREDIENT MENU/FILL/DISPENSE
CYCLES
PARAMETER:FILL/DISPENSE CYCLES
RANGE: 0 - 9,999
DEFAULT: 1
NOTE:
For continuous fills/dispenses set the parameter
to 0.
Step 1. The cursor is in front of Fill Cycles. If you are
entering this parameter for the first time, use the
alphanumeric key pad and enter the number of
cycles you want for this ingredient. (See Fig. 4-15)
Step 2. If a value already exists, press the Clear button to
clear the previous entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter the number
of cycles for this ingredient. In our example we set
15 cycles for the ingredient Flour. (See Fig. 4-15)
FIG. 4-16 INGREDIENT MENU/TARGET WEIGHT
Step 2. If a value already exists, press the Clear button to
clear the previous entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter the target
weight for this ingredient. In our example we used
100.00 lbs. (See Fig. 4-17)
FIG. 4-17 TARGET WEIGHT PARAMETER
Step 4. Press the Enter button. The Target Weight is set and
the cursor moves to Target Preact. (See Fig. 4-18)
Target Preact
About Target Preact
FIG. 4-15 FILL/DISPENSE/CYCLES PARAMETER
Step 4. Press the Enter button. The cycles are set and the
cursor moves to Target Wt. (See Fig. 4-16)
Target Weight
About Target Weight
The Target Weight is the gain-in-weight (Fill) or loss-inweight value (Dispense) you want for this ingredient. If you
want one cycle to fill/dispense 100 lbs of an ingredient, you
set the Target Weight to 100. Keep in mind that the Units
Target Preact is the number of units above or below the set
point value (Target Weight) at which time you want the relay
to trip. Use as an “in flight” compensation value for the time
it takes for a valve, gate to close or a conveyor to stop. You
want to set the Target Preact to start closing/stopping so that
when it closes or stops completely the Target Weight Set
Point is reached.
About Smart Preact
Smart Preact is an automatic function that calculates the
loss-in-weight/gain-in-weight during a cycle to determine if
the Target Preact Set Point is set so that the cycle is within
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
26
the Target Weight Tolerance. If it is not, the instrument automatically calculates a new Target Preact so that the next
cycle is hitting the Target Weight. While the Smart Preact is
on, the Filler/Dispenser continues to determine the Smart
Preact Set Point maintaining and/or improving Fill/Dispense
accuracy.
PARAMETER:TARGET PREACT
RANGE: .000001 - 999,999
DEFAULT: 1.0 SMART PREACT: OFF
Step 1. The cursor is in front of Target Preact. (See Fig. 418)
FIG. 4-21 TARGET PREACT MENU/SMART
PREACT
Step 7. Press the Exit button to get back to the /Adjust
Ingredient 1 Menu.
Target Window
About Target Window
FIG. 4-18 TARGET PREACT PARAMETER
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Target Preact Menu
appears. (See Fig. 4-19)
The Target Window is the weight tolerance for an ingredient.
There is a Maximum tolerance and a Minimum tolerance setting. The Maximum tolerance is the weight above the target
weight you can accept you your process. The Minimum is
the weight below the target weight you can accept in your
process. The Target Window can be set as weight or percentage.
PARAMETER:TARGET WINDOW (WT)
RANGE: MIN WT. .000000-999,999
MAX WT. .000000-999,999
DEFAULT: 1.0
FIG. 4-19 TARGET PREACT SUB-MENU
Step 3. Press the Clear button to clear the previous entry.
Step 4. Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter the Target
Preact Value for this ingredient. In our example we
used 3.00 lbs as the Target Preact. (See Fig. 4-20)
PARAMETER:TARGET WINDOW (%)
RANGE: MIN% 0.00-99.9
MAX% 0.00-99.9
DEFAULT: 2
Step 1. The cursor should be in front of Target Window. If
it is not, use the up and down arrow buttons to
move the cursor in front of Target Window. (See
Fig. 4-22)
Step 2. Press the left or right button to select Weight (WT)
or Percentage (%). (See Figs. 4-22 & 4-23)
FIG. 4-20 TARGET PREACT MENU/SET PREACT
Step 5. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Smart Preact. (See Fig. 4-21)
Step 6. Use the left or right arrow to toggle between OFF
and ON. In our example we turned the Smart Preact
ON. (See Fig. 4-21)
FIG. 4-22 INGREDIENT SETUP MENU/SELECTING
TARGET WINDOW/WEIGHT
27
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
ance value either in weight or percentage. (See Fig.
4-25)
Step 11. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 12. Press the Exit button to return to the Adjust Ingredient 1 Menu. The cursor should be in front of JOG. If
it is not press the up or down arrow until the cursor
is in front of JOG. (See Fig. 4-26)
FIG. 4-23 INGREDIENT SETUP MENU/SELECTING
TARGET WINDOW/PERCENTAGE
Step 3. Press the Enter button to access the parameter values.
Step 4. Press the Clear button to clear the entry. Use the
alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Max tolerance value either in weight or percentage.
Step 5. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 6. Press the down arrow button so the cursor is in front
of Target Max. (See Fig. 4-24)
FIG. 4-24 TARGET WINDOW/WEIGHT
Step 7. Press the Clear button to clear the entry. Use the
alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Max tolerance value either in weight or percentage. (See Fig.
4-25)
FIG. 4-26 ADJUST INGREDIENT 1/JOG
Jog Parameters
About Jog Parameters
The Jog is used when a cycle underfills. At the end of a cycle
the system waits to determine the status of a fill/dispense. If
there is an underfill, (i.e. the fill is below the Target Window) the system waits and then the jog is turned on. The
Filler/Dispenser jogs for a preset period of time for a preset
number of cycles until the fill/dispense is within the Target
Window. If at the end of the jog counts the weight is still not
within the Target Window, you have the option to go through
the jog cycles again. The Jog parameters include the Jog On
Time, the amount of time you want the jog to run for each
jog count. The Jog Count which is the number of times you
want the instrument to go through the jog cycle. The Jog Off
Time is the time you want the jog to be off while the instrument calculates the change in weight to see if the jog
increased the weight so that the fill/dispense is within the
Target Window. To shut OFF the Jog function, set the Jog On
Time to 0.
NOTE:
FIG. 4-25 TARGET WINDOW/PERCENTAGE
NOTE:
If you set the Target Weight parameter in weight,
when you view the settings in percentage the set
weight is automatically converted to the correct
percentage and vice versa.
Step 8. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 9. Press the down arrow button so the cursor is in front
of Target Min. (See Fig. 4-24)
Step 10. Press the Clear button to clear the entry. Use the
alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Max toler-
The Jog settings should be made in conjunction
with the Fast and Slow Fill timers. It is recommended that the AutoPreact be turned on so that
the system can self adjust until you no longer
need a jog during each cycle. If the instrument
goes through the jog sequence for each cycle you
will need to adjust the Fill/Dispense Timers and/
or the Preact.
PARAMETER:JOG ON TIME
RANGE: 00.0-99.9
DEFAULT: 2.50
PARAMETER:JOG COUNT
RANGE: 0-9
DEFAULT: 5
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
28
PARAMETER:JOG OFF TIME
RANGE: 00.0-99.9
DEFAULT: 1.00
FIG. 4-30 JOG OFF TIME PARAMETER
FIG. 4-27 ADJUST INGREDIENT 1/JOG
Step 1. Press the Enter button. The Jog Menu appears with
the cursor in front of Jog On Time. (See Fig. 4-28)
Step 10. Press the Clear button to clear the previous entry.
Step 11. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Jog
Off time. In our example we used 1.00 second.
Step 12. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 13. Press the Exit button to return to the Adjust Ingredient 1 Menu.
Fill/Dispense Time Parameter
About Fill/Dispense Timer
The Fill/Dispense Timer sets the time limit allowed to complete one cycle. To turn off the timer, set the Timer to 0.
FIG. 4-28 JOG MENU/DEFAULT SETTINGS
Step 2. Press the Clear button to clear the previous entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Jog
On time. In our example we use 1.00 second.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the down arrow to move the cursor in front of
Jog Count. (See Fig. 4-29)
PARAMETER:FILL TIMER
RANGE: 0-999
DEFAULT: 120 SECONDS
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Fill Timer. (See Fig. 4-31)
FIG. 4-31 FILL TIMER PARAMETER
FIG. 4-29 JOG COUNT PARAMETER
Step 6. Press the Clear button to clear the previous entry.
Step 7. Use the right or left arrow button to increase or
decrease the Jog Count value.
Step 8. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 9. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Jog Off Time. (See Fig. 4-30)
Step 2. You can press the right or left button to increase or
decrease the Fill time or press the Clear button to
clear the current entry and use the alphanumeric
key pad to enter the new Fill Timer parameter. In
our example we used 120 seconds.
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Wait Timer Parameter
About Wait Timer
The Wait Timer parameter is the time after a fill/dispense
cycle you want the system to wait in order to allow the system to settle and calculate the fill/dispense weight to see of
the fill/dispense is within the Target Window before moving
29
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
onto another fill/dispense function. To shut off the Wait
Timer set the parameter to 0.
PARAMETER:WAIT TIMER
RANGE: 0-999.9
DEFAULT: 2.00
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Wait Timer. (See Fig. 4-32)
FIG. 4-34 FILL PROOF MENU
1.
2.
3.
4.
FIG. 4-32 WAIT TIMER PARAMETER
Step 2. Press the Clear button to clear the current entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Wait
Timer parameter. In our example we used 4.000
seconds.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Speed Parameter
About the Speed Parameter
5.
6.
•
Press the right or left arrow buttons to
toggle between OFF and ON.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Switch time.
Use the right or left arrow buttons to
increase or decrease the Switch Time.
In our example we used 5 seconds.
The Switch Time is the time set to
sense that a switch, gate, valve is
open.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press Exit to return the Adjust Ingredient 1 Menu.
If you select Dual Speed, press the enter
button. The Dual Speed Filler/Dispenser
Menu appears. (See Fig. 4-35)
The Speed Parameter sets the Fill/Dispenser to a Dual Speed
Filler/Dispenser (Fast & Slow) or a Single Feed Filler/Dispenser. Set this parameter based on what your process
requires.
PARAMETER:SPEED PARAMETER
RANGE: DUAL/SINGLE SPEED
DEFAULT: SINGLE
FIG. 4-35 DUAL SPEED FILLER MENU
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Speed. (See Fig. 4-33)
1.
2.
3.
FIG. 4-33 SPEED PARAMETER
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow button to toggle
between Dual Speed and Single Speed.
•
If you select Single Speed, press the Enter
button. The Discharge Time Menu
appears. (See Fig. 4-34)
4.
Fast Weight - Press the right or left
arrow to increase or decrease the
weight.
Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Auto Fast Adj. Press the
right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between ON and OFF
Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Mode - Press the right or
left arrow buttons to toggle between
Sequential or Simultaneous.
Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Fill Proof Menu. (See
Fig. 4-36)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
30
14. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
15. Press the Exit button to return to the
Dual Speed Filler Menu.
16. Press the Exit button to return to the
Adjust Ingredient 1 Menu. (See Fig.
4-39)
FIG. 4-36 DUAL SPEED FILLER/FILL PROOF MENU
5.
Press the Enter button, the Fill Proof
Menu appears. (See Fig. 4-37)
FIG. 4-39 ADJUST INGREDIENT/INGREDIENT 1
SET TO FLOUR
FIG. 4-37 FILL PROOF MENU
6.
Set the Fast Switch - Press the right or
left arrow buttons to toggle between
OFF and ON.
7. Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Slow Switch.
8. Set the Slow Switch - Press the right
or left arrow buttons to toggle
between OFF and ON.
9. Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Fast Switch Tmr (Timer).
10. Press the right or left arrow buttons to
increase or decrease the Fast Switch
Timer. This is the time you want the
Fast Switch to remain on.
11. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
12. Press the down arrow until the cursor
is in front of Slow Switch Tmr
(Timer). (See Fig. 4-38)
Step 3. If this is the only ingredient you are configuring,
press the Exit button to return to the Configuration
Menu.
Step 4. If there are more ingredients used in this process, or
you want to set up ingredients for other processes,
press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Ingredient 2. (See Fig. 40)
FIG. 4-40 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR
INGREDIENT 2
Step 5. Press the Enter button and repeat the configuration
process until you have configured all the ingredients you want for your process(es). You can set up
to 12 ingredients.
Instrument Configuration
FIG. 4-38 FILL PROOF MENU
13. Press the right or left arrow buttons to
increase or decrease the Slow Switch
Timer. This is the time you want the
Slow Switch to remain on.
The Instrument Configuration process sets up the instrument
to operate as a scale and the setup for the operating parameters required for your filling/dispensing process. This
includes setting WAVERSAVER®, Scale Capacity, Units of
Measure, Motion tolerance and other instrument parameters
required for your Filling/Dispensing process. Here is where
the permanent parameters are entered. All the parameters
configured except the communications parameters, (IP
Address etc.) are stored in the Secure Memory Module
(SMM).
31
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 1. In the Configuration Menu, press the down arrow
until the cursor is in front of SETUP. (See Fig. 441)
Instrument ID
About Instrument ID
The Instrument ID parameter is used to provide specific
identification for a Filler/Dispenser. This is extremely
important when using several Filler/Dispensers in a process.
A unique Instrument ID allows you to identify one instrument from another. The Instrument ID is also useful when
setting up the ingredients for a filling/dispensing process.
FIG. 4-41 CONFIGURATION MENU/SETUP
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The SETUP MENU appears
with the cursor in front of Operator ID. (See Fig. 442)
PARAMETER:INSTRUMENT ID
RANGE: 19 CHARACTERS
DEFAULT: HARDY FILLER OR HARDY
DISPENSER
Step 1. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Instrument ID. (See Fig. 4-43)
Operator ID
About Operator ID
The Operator ID is the ID of the user who is going to operate
the Filler/Dispenser or service the instrument. Select three
letters or numbers or any combination of the two that adequately identifies the user. We have provided some examples
below for your assistance. The Operator ID is used in connection with the security level of the user.
FIG. 4-43 INSTRUMENT ID PARAMETER
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Instrument ID Menu
appears. (See Fig. 4-44)
FIG. 4-42 SETUP MENU/OPERATOR ID
Step 1. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter your Operator ID or press the Clear button to clear the previous
entry and use the alphanumeric key pad to enter you
Operator ID.
Step 2. A Operator ID is three (3) characters long and can
consist of alphanumeric characters.
Some examples of Operator IDs:
•
•
•
•
Joe
312
J15
JD7
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
FIG. 4-44 INSTRUMENT ID MENU/CHEM 3 FILLER
Step 3. Press the Clear button to clear the current entry.
Step 4. Use the alphanumeric buttons to enter a new Instrument ID. It is important to be as descriptive as you
can in 19 characters. In our example we identified
the instrument as the Chemical 3 Filler. This that
this is the 3rd Chemical Filler in a process.
Step 5. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 6. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
Step 7. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
OK to Fill Inpt. (See Fig. 4-45)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
OK to Fill Input Parameter
32
Step 6. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Discharge. (See Fig. 4-47)
About OK to Fill Input Parameter
Discharge Parameters
The OK to Fill Input Parameter is user selectable and is one
of the alarm settings. When the OK to Fill Input Parameter is
on, the instrument Auto Tares the scale and resets and starts
the Fill/Dispense timer. If for any reason the instrument cannot detect the OK to Fill input before the OK to Fill timer
times out, the Not OK to Fill Alarm appears.
PARAMETER:OK TO FILL INPUT PARAMETER
RANGE: ON/OFF
DEFAULT: ON
About the Discharge Parameters
If your process requires you to discharge from the filled vessel you need to turn on the Discharge function. If you turn
the Discharge ON, the Discharge Menu will display and you
can select between Auto Discharge, OK to Discharge, Proof
Switch Alarm, Switch Timer and/or the Aux (Auxiliary)
Device Timer. The Aux (Auxiliary) Device Timer turns on a
vibrator feeder or other device if the Not OK to Discharge
Alarm occurs. If you select OFF the Discharge Menu does
not display. Make sure you set the Zero Tolerance to determine when the fill vessel is empty (i.e. completed the discharge).
PARAMETER:DISCHARGE
RANGE: ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
FIG. 4-45 OK TO FILL INPUT PARAMETER
Step 1. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between ON and OFF.
Step 2. If you have turned the OK to Fill ON, press the
Enter button. The OK TO FILL MENU appears.
(See Fig. 4-46)
PARAMETER:AUTO DISCHARGE
RANGE: ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:OK TO DISCHARGE
RANGE: ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:PROOF SWITCH
RANGE: ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:SWITCH TIMER
RANGE: 0-99
DEFAULT: 5 SECONDS
FIG. 4-46 OK TO FILL MENU/SETTING OK TO FILL
TIMER
PARAMETER:OK TO FILL TIMER
RANGE: 0-999
DEFAULT: 10 SECONDS
Step 3. Press the right or left arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the OK to Fill Time. In our example we set
the timer for 10 seconds.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
NOTE:
If you toggle the Ok to Fill to OFF, the OK to Fill
Menu will not appear.
PARAMETER:AUX DEVICE TIMER
RANGE: 0-99
DEFAULT: 10 SECONDS
NOTE:
The description for these parameters is located in
the HI 3010 User Guide.
Step 1. To select Discharge press on the left or right arrow
buttons to toggle Discharge ON or OFF. (See Fig.
4-47)
33
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 8. Press the right or left arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the OK to Discharge time.
Step 9. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 10. Press the Exit button to return to the Discharge
Menu.
Step 11. Press the down button until the cursor is in front of
Proof Switch. (See Fig. 4-51)
FIG. 4-47 SETUP MENU/DISCHARGE PARAMETER
Step 2. With Discharge toggled ON, Press the Enter button.
The Discharge Menu appears with the cursor in
front of Auto-Discharge. (See Fig. 4-48)
FIG. 4-51 DISCHARGE MENU/PROOF SWITCH
About Proof Switch
FIG. 4-48 DISCHARGE MENU/AUTO-DISCHARGE
Step 3. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle AutoDischarge ON or OFF.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
OK to Discharge. (See Fig. 4-49)
When you turn ON the Proof Switch, it senses the state of a
physical actuator or a proximity sensor, for example, to
determine if a gate is open or closed. If the gate is closed
when it should be open or vice versa, an alarm is displayed
that says “NO DISCHARGE PROOF ALARM” depending
on how your system is configured.
Step 12. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle the
Proof Switch OFF or ON.
Step 13. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 14. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Switch timer. (See Fig. 4-52)
FIG. 4-49 DISCHARGE MENU/OK TO DISCHARGE
Step 6. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle the
OK to Discharge ON or OFF.
Step 7. If you toggle the OK to Discharge ON, press the
Enter button. The OK to Discharge Menu appears.
(See Fig. 4-50)
FIG. 4-50 OK TO DISCHARGE MENU
FIG. 4-52 DISCHARGE MENU/SWITCH TIMER
Step 15. Press the right or left arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the time.
Step 16. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 17. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Aux Device Tmr (Auxiliary Device Timer).
(See Fig. 4-53)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
34
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Refill. (See Fig. 4-54)
FIG. 4-53 DISCHARGE MENU/AUXILIARY DEVICE
TIMER
FIG. 4-54 SETUP MENU/REFILL
About the Auxiliary Device Timer
An example of an Auxiliary Device is a vibrator for a feeder
to correct bridging that can occur with some materials when
being discharged from a vessel. The timer setting sets how
long the Auxiliary Device should remain on until the bridging condition corrects itself. An Auxiliary Device can be any
device you want to enable. The timer is set based on your
process requirements.
Step 18. Press the right or left arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the time you want the Auxiliary Device to
operate.
Step 19. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 20. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
Refill Parameters
About the Filler Refill Parameters
The Refill pertains to the vessel that is putting material into
the filler vessel. This vessel must have enough material to
complete one whole fill cycle of all the fill cycles depending
on your application. The refill vessel will probably have
level sensors indicating a high and low level. When you turn
on the Refill the instrument sees the low level sensor, for
example, that is calling for more material. It opens a gate or
valve until the material level reached the high level sensor, at
which time it closes the gate. If you turn on the Initial Refill,
it will make sure that you have enough material at the first
fill cycle. The Refill can operate at any time during filling to
make sure that the refill vessel has enough material for a fill
cycle(s).
NOTE:
You must map the High and Low Level Sensors to
the instrument.
PARAMETER:REFILL
RANGE: OFF/ON
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:INITIAL REFILL
RANGE: OFF/ON
DEFAULT: OFF
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Refill Menu appears
with the cursor in front of Refill. (See Fig. 4-55)
FIG. 4-55 REFILL MENU/REFILL
Step 3. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between ON and OFF.
Step 4. Press the enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Initial Refill. (See Fig. 4-56)
FIG. 4-56 REFILL MENU/INITIAL REFILL
Step 6. Press the right or left arrow button to toggle
between OFF and ON.
Step 7. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 8. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
About the Dispenser/IBC Refill Parameters
The Refill pertains to the Dispensing vessel and is actuated
by the Refill Weight Parameter. The Dispense vessel must
have enough material to complete one whole dispense cycle.
If Refill is on, prior to starting a dispense cycle the instrument checks the weight in the vessel. If the weight in the
vessel is below the Refill Weight it initializes the Refill function and refills the vessel to the preset Refill Weight, then
starts the dispense cycle(s). The Refill must occur in a preset
35
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
period of time by setting the Refill Duration parameter. If the
Refill takes more time than the preset Refill Duration the dispense is paused and an alarm appears. In addition to the
Refill parameters you can set the Proof Switch to ON to
determine that the refill gate or valve is open. The Switch
Time sets the time it takes for the Proof Switch valve or gate
to open If the time exceeds the preset Switch Time an alarm
appears saying that the Proof Switch did not open.
PARAMETER:PROOF SWITCH
RANGE: OFF/ON
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:SWITCH TIME
RANGE: 0-99 SECONDS
DEFAULT: 5 SECONDS
PARAMETER:REFILL WEIGHT
RANGE: 0.01 - 999999
DEFAULT: 1000.0
PARAMETER:REFILL DURATION
RANGE: 0-99 SECONDS
DEFAULT: 60 SECONDS
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Refill. (See. Fig. 4-57)
REFILL MENU
Ref il l
ON
> Initial Ref il l
OFF
Ref il l Pr f Sw
ON
FIG. 4-59 REFILL MENU/INITIAL REFILL
Step 6. Press the right or left arrow button to toggle
between OFF and ON.
Step 7. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 8. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Refill Prf Sw. (See Fig. 4-60)
REFILL MENU
Initial Ref il l
OFF
> Ref il l Pr f Sw
ON
Ref il l Wt
1000.00
FIG. 4-60 REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL PROOF
SWITCH
Step 9. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between ON and OFF.
Step 10. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 11. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Refill Sw Timer. (See Fig. 4-61)
FIG. 4-57 SETUP MENU/REFILL
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Refill Menu appears
with the cursor in front of Refill. (See Fig. 4-58)
REFILL MENU
> Ref il l
ON
Initial Ref il l
OFF
Ref il l Pr f Sw
ON
FIG. 4-58 REFILL MENU/REFILL
Step 3. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between ON and OFF.
Step 4. Press the enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Initial Refill. (See Fig. 4-59)
REFILL MENU
Initial Ref il l
OFF
Ref il l Pr f Sw
ON
> Ref il l SwTimer
5s
FIG. 4-61 REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL
SWITCH TIMER
Step 12. Press the left or right arrow button to select the
Refill Switch time.
Step 13. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 14. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Refill Wt. (See Fig. 4-62)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
REFILL MENU
Ref il l SwTimer
5s
> Ref il l Wt
1000.00
Ref il l timer
60s
FIG. 4-62 REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL
WEIGHT
Step 15. Press the Clear button to clear the entry. Use the
Alphanumeric keypad to enter the new Refill
Weight.
Step 16. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 17. Press the Down arrow to move the cursor in front of
Refill Timer. (See Fig. 4-63)
REFILL MENU
Ref il l SwTimer
5s
Ref il l Wt
1000.00
> Ref il l Timer
60s
36
The Printer provides a hard copy of a fill/dispense. You can
also select whether you want the Auto Print function which
will automatically print the results after every fill/dispense.
Check you Printer User Guide or Technical Manual to determine the parameters for your printer. If you don’t have the
Printer User guide or Technical Manual, check with your
Network Administrator for the parameter settings.
PARAMETER:BAUD RATE
RANGE: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
DEFAULT: 9600
PARAMETER:PARITY
RANGE: NONE, ODD, EVEN
DEFAULT: NONE
PARAMETER:DATA BITS
RANGE: 7 OR 8
DEFAULT: 8
PARAMETER:AUTO PRINT
RANGE: ON/OF
DEFAULT: OFF
Step 1. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Serial Port. (See Fig. 4-64)
FIG. 4-63 REFILL MENU/SETTING REFILL TIMER
Step 18. Press the right or left arrow button to increase or
decrease the Refill time.
Step 19. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 20. Press the Exit to return to the Main Menu.
Serial Port Parameters
About the Serial Port Setup Parameters
The Serial Port Parameters are set to operate the Printer
which can print out the status of a fill/dispense. The Printer
prints:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Date and time of the Fill/Dispense
Instrument ID
Ingredient ID
Each Amount Required
Number of Fills/Dispenses Requested
User ID
Time each fill began
Amount Requested per fill/dispense cycle
Actual amount received per fill/dispense
cycle
Alarms that occurred and times
Acceptance or Rejection of a fill/dispense
and time
Total Number of Cycles
Total Weight of the Fill/Dispense
FIG. 4-64 SETUP MENU/SERIAL PORT
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Serial Port Menu
appears with the cursor in front of Print Port. (See
Fig. 4-65)
FIG. 4-65 SERIAL PORT MENU/PRINTER PORT
SETUP
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The Printer Port Menu
appears. (See Fig. 4-66)
37
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
•
•
8
7
Step 10. Press the enter button to set the entry.
Step 11. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Auto Print. (See Fig. 4-69)
FIG. 4-66 PRINTER PORT MENU/BAUD RATE
Step 4. Press the right or left arrow buttons to select the
Baud Rate. The Selections are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
Step 5. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 6. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Parity. (See Fig. 4-67)
FIG. 4-69 PRINTER PORT MENU/AUTO PRINT
Step 12. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between OFF or ON.
Step 13. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 14. Press the Exit button two (2) times to return to the
SETUP MENU.
Totalizer Parameter
About the Totalizer Parameter
Setting the Totalizer to ON sets the Totalizer function for all
12 ingredients. This function calculates the total amount of
material by weight that was used during the fill. You can also
Clear the Totalizer either for each ingredient or for all ingredients.
FIG. 4-67 PRINTER PORT MENU/PARITY
Step 7. Press the right or left arrow buttons to select Parity.
The Selections are:
•
•
•
NONE
ODD
EVEN
Step 8. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Data Bits. (See Fig. 4-68)
PARAMETER:TOTALIZER
RANGE: ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:CLEAR TOTALIZER
RANGE: 0-12 INGREDIENTS
DEFAULT: INGREDIENT 1
Step 1. Press the down button until the cursor is in front of
Totalizer. (See Fig. 4-70)
FIG. 4-70 SETUP MENU/TOTALIZER
FIG. 4-68 PRINTER PORT MENU/DATA BITS
Step 9. Press the right or left arrow buttons to select the
Data Bits you want. The Selections are:
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between OFF or ON.
Step 3. If you select ON, you have turned on the Totalizer
for all 12 ingredient selections.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Step 4. To clear the Totalizer for all 12 ingredients or for
each individual ingredient press the Enter button.
The Totalizer Menu appears. (See Fig. 4-71)
38
Step 11. Press the Enter button. All totals are cleared.
Step 12. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
Unit of Measure Parameters
About Unit of Measure
The Unit of Measure Parameter sets the scale to either English or Metric units. The Selections are:
•
•
•
•
FIG. 4-71 TOTALIZER MENU/CHOOSING
INGREDIENT TOTALIZER NUMBER
Step 5. Press the left or right arrow buttons to select the
Ingredient Totalizer you want to view.
Step 6. Press the Enter button. The Totalizer Number Menu
appears with the cursor in front Total Wt. (See Fig.
4-72) In our example we selected Ingredient Totalizer #1.
NOTE:
Pounds (lb)
Ounces (oz)
Kilograms (kg)
Grams (g)
Changing the units of measure converts all
parameter settings to the selected units.
PARAMETER:UNIT OF MEASURE
RANGE: LB, KG. OZ, G
DEFAULT: LB
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Unit of Measure. (See Fig. 4-74)
FIG. 4-72 TOTALIZER NUMBER MENU
Step 7. Total WT. and Total CT. are read only.
Step 8. To Clear the Totals for Ingredient Number 1:
FIG. 4-74 SETUP MENU/UNIT OF MEASURE
•
•
Press the down arrow until the cursor is in
front of Clear Totalizer.
Press the Enter button. The Total WT and
Total CT entries turn to 00.00.
Step 9. Press the Exit button to return to the Totalizer
Menu.
Step 10. To clear all totals for all 12 ingredients, press the
down arrow until the cursor is in front of Clear All
Totals. (See Fig. 4-73)
FIG. 4-73 CLEARING ALL TOTALS FOR ALL 12
INGREDIENTS
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow buttons to make your
selection.
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Decimal Point Parameter
About the Decimal Point Parameter
The Decimal Point Parameter is set to determine the resolution you want for a fill/dispense. Here you set the location of
the decimal point for the weight resolution. The higher the
number the farther to the left the decimal point moves and
the higher the resolution of the scale. It is important to note
that setting the resolution does effect the overall accuracy of
the instrument. Increasing the number of decimal points
increases the overall accuracy of the instrument.
PARAMETER:DECIMAL POINT
RANGE: 0-6
DEFAULT: 2
39
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Decimal Point. (See Fig. 4-75)
Base Motion Number = (Total Load Cell Capacity/10,000) x
3
NOTE:
Motion Tolerance must be greater than or equal
to the Graduation Sizes. Our recommendation is
three (3) graduation sizes.
PARAMETER:MOTION TOLERANCE
RANGE: .000001 - 999999
DEFAULT: 10
FIG. 4-75 SETUP MENU/DECIMAL POINT
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Motion Tol (Tolerance). (See Fig. 4-77)
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow buttons to make your
selection.
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Total Decimal Point Parameter
About the Total Decimal Point Parameter
The Total Decimal Point Parameter sets the decimal point for
the Totalizer. The higher the number the farther to the left the
decimal moves and the higher the resolution of the scale.
FIG. 4-77 SETUP MENU/MOTION TOLERANCE
PARAMETER:TOTAL DECIMAL POINT
RANGE: 0-6
DEFAULT: 0
Step 2. Press the Clear button to clear the current entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new tolerance value.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 1. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of the Total Decimal Pt. (See Fig. 4-76)
Zero Tolerance Parameter
About the Zero Tolerance Parameter
The Zero Tolerance parameter sets the weight units from
zero that will be accepted as zero by the instrument. You can
also turn on Auto Zero tolerance and set the Auto Zero Tolerance parameter and time. The Auto Zero Tolerance time
setting sets the time it should take to Auto Zero the scale.
NOTE
FIG. 4-76 SETUP MENU/TOTAL DECIMAL POINT
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow buttons to make your
selection.
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Motion Tolerance Parameter
About Motion Tolerance
Motion is the amount of allowable deviation between consecutive readings before a weighment is accepted as being
complete. Setting Motion Tolerance establishes the amount
of deviation you can allow in your particular fill/dispense
process. The base motion number can be calculated by using
the following formula:
The amount of weight zeroed off is cumulative. The zero
command will fail if the current gross weight plus any previously
zeroed amount exceeds the zero tolerance.
About the Auto Zero Tolerance Parameter
If ON, Auto Zero automatically zeros the empty scale to
gross zero in the pre-set time before the OK to Fill becomes
active. When OK to Fill is activated it tares the scale to Net
zero.
PARAMETER:ZERO TOLERANCE
RANGE: .000001-999999
DEFAULT: 10.0
PARAMETER:USE AUTO ZERO TOLERANCE
RANGE: OFF/ON
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
DEFAULT: OFF
PARAMETER:AUTO ZERO TIME
RANGE: .01-9.99 SECONDS
DEFAULT: 1.00 SECOND
40
Step 7. Press the right or left arrow buttons to toggle
between OFF or ON.
Step 8. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 9. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of AZERO Tol. (See Fig. 4-81)
Step 1. Press the down button until the cursor is in front of
Zero Tolerance. (See Fig. 4-78)
FIG. 4-81 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/AUTO ZERO
TOLERANCE
FIG. 4-78 SETUP MENU/ZERO TOLERANCE
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Zero Tolerance Menu
appears with the cursor in front of Zero Tolerance.
(See Fig. 4-79)
FIG. 4-79 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/ZERO
TOLERANCE
Step 3. Press the Clear button to clear the current value.
Step 4. Used the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new
Zero Tolerance value.
Step 5. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
NOTE:
Zero Tolerance should be set if you are going to
use the Discharge Function. Setting the zero tolerance sets the parameter that indicates when a
vessel is empty after discharging a fill.
Step 6. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Use Auto Zero. (See Fig. 4-80)
Step 10. Press the Clear button to clear the current value.
Step 11. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new
Auto Zero Tolerance value.
Step 12. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 13. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Auto Zero Time. (See Fig. 4-82)
FIG. 4-82 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/AUTO ZERO
TIME
Step 14. Press the Clear button to clear the current value.
Step 15. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new
time.
Step 16. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 17. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
Tare Limit Parameter
About the Tare Limit Parameter
The Tare Limit Parameter limits the amount of automatic
tare. Tare is the artificial zeroing of the weight hopper so that
a new weight can be displayed. Also, the action of adjusting
out the know weight of the container from the total indicated
weight, so that the indicator reads net weight directly.
PARAMETER:TARE LIMIT
RANGE: .000001-999999
DEFAULT: 999999
FIG. 4-80 ZERO TOLERANCE MENU/USE AUTO
ZERO
Step 1. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Tare Limit. (See Fig. 4-83)
41
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 1. Press the Down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Averages. (See Fig. 4-84)
FIG. 4-83 SETUP MENU/TARE LIMIT
Step 2. Press the Clear button to clear the current entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new Tare
Limit value.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
FIG. 4-84 SETUP MENU/AVERAGES
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the number of averages.
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Averages Parameter
Scale Capacity Parameter
About the Averages Parameter
About the Scale Capacity Parameter
This setting is to aid in ignoring the effects of material
impact. If material is not entering or exiting the scale evenly,
weight fluctuations can be seen. Applications requiring very
quick weight readings should reduce this setting to it’s minimum. If the weight is unstable due to material impacting,
increase the averages. This sets the number of weight readings that will be used to compute the displayed weight. The
average is a sliding average so that a new average is available for display at every reading.
The Filler/Dispenser does 55 updates per second which
translates to an update approximately every 20 milliseconds.
If you average enough weight readings the weight loss or
gain remains smooth. If you average the weight too much
you can cause over filling. Here is an example of 5 averages
reading 5 Engineering Units (EU):
20ms
20ms
20ms
20ms
20ms
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
5
5
0
0
5
5
5
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
1
2
3
4
5 = 5 EU in 100ms
If this value is exceeded by 5% a HI indication appears on
the front display. Communications to and from optional
devices are not effected. This value is the nominal operating
capacity of the scale. (It is recommended that you use the
default parameter)
PARAMETER:SCALE CAP
RANGE: .000001-999999
DEFAULT: 999999
Step 1. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Scale Cap. (See Fig. 4-85)
FIG. 4-85 SETUP MENU/SCALE CAPACITY
TABLE 4-1: 5 AVERAGES READING 5 EU
PARAMETER:AVERAGES
RANGE: 1-250
DEFAULT: 1
Step 2. Press the Clear button to clear the current entry.
Step 3. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new
Scale Capacity value.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
The WAVERSAVER® Parameter
About the WAVERSAVER Parameter
Typically, mechanical noise (from other machinery in a plant
environment) is present in forces larger than the weight
forces trying to be detected. The Filler/Dispenser is fitted
with WAVERSAVER® technology which eliminates the
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
effects of vibratory forces present in all industrial weight
control and measurement applications. By eliminating the
factor of vibratory forces the Filler/Dispenser is capable of
identifying the actual weight data. WAVERSAVER® enables
the Filler/Dispenser to distinguish between actual weight
data and mechanical noise, both of which are typically transferred to the Filler/Dispenser by the load cell signal.
WAVERSAVER® can be configured to ignore noise with frequencies as low as 0.25 Hz. One of four higher additional cut
off frequencies may be selected to provide a faster instrument response time. The function is user selectable and can
be turned off.
PARAMETER:WAVERSAVER®
RANGE: .25 HZ, .50 HZ, 1.0 HZ, 3.50 HZ, 7.50 HZ,
OFF
DEFAULT: 1.00 HZ
42
PARAMETER:DAY
RANGE: dd (01-31)
DEFAULT: NONE
PARAMETER:YEAR
RANGE: yyyy (2001, 2002, 2003)
DEFAULT: NONE
PARAMETER:TIMEZONE
RANGE: -12 TO +12
DEFAULT: -8
Step 1. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Set Clock. (See Fig. 4-87)
Step 1. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of WAVERSAVER®. (See Fig. 4-86)
FIG. 4-87 SETUP MENU/SET CLOCK
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Clock Setup Menu
appears with the cursor in front of Set Hours. (See
Fig. 4-88)
FIG. 4-86 SETUP MENU/WAVERSAVER
Step 2. Press the right or left arrow buttons to select the setting or turn WAVERSAVER off.
Step 3. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Set Clock Parameter
About Setting the Clock
You set the Hour, Minutes, Month, Day and Year parameters
here. The settings are important when printing out the fill/
dispense data. These settings are the time stamps for the
alarms and fills/dispenses. The Timezone setting is used to
date the e-mails that are sent from the instrument in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
PARAMETER:HOURS
RANGE: hh (01-24)
DEFAULT: NONE
PARAMETER:MINUTES
RANGE: mm (01-60)
DEFAULT: NONE
PARAMETER:MONTH
RANGE: Jan. thru Dec.
DEFAULT: NONE
FIG. 4-88 CLOCK SETUP MENU/SET HOURS
Step 3. Press the right or left arrow buttons to change the
Hours setting.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Set Minutes.
Step 6. Press the right or left arrow buttons to change the
Minutes setting.
Step 7. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 8. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Set Month. (See Fig. 4-89)
43
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
GMT
GMT
GMT: Greenwich Mean
UT: Universal
UTC: Universal Co-ordinated
WET: Western Europe
CET: Central Europe
Paris, France
Berlin, Germany
Amsterdam, Holland
Brussels, Belgium
Vienna, Austria
Madrid, Spain
Rome, Italy
Bern, Switzerland
Oslo, Norway
+2
EET: Eastern Europe
Athens, Greece
Helsinki, Finland
Istanbul, Turkey
Jerusalem, Israel
Harare, Zimbabwe
+3
BT: Baghdad
Kuwait
Nairobi, Kenya
Riyadh, Saudi Arabia
Moscow. Russia
Tehran, Iran
+4
Abu Dhabi, UAE
Muscat
Tblisi
Volgograd
Kabul
+4:30
FIG. 4-90 CLOCK SETUP MENU/SET GMT
London, England
Dublin, Ireland
Edinburgh, Scotland
Reykjavik, Iceland
Casablanca, Morocco
+1
+3:30
CLOCK SETUP MENU
Set Day
02
Set Year
2003
> Timezone
-8
Cities
EAST OF GREENWICH
FIG. 4-89 CLOCK SETUP MENU/SET MONTH
Step 9. Press the right or left arrow buttons to change the
Month setting.
Step 10. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 11. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Set Day.
Step 12. Press the right or left arrow buttons to change the
Day setting.
Step 13. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 14. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Set Year.
Step 15. Press the right or left arrow buttons to change the
Year setting.
Step 16. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 17. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Timezone. (See Fig.4-90)
Civilian Time Zones
Afghanistan
+5
+5:30
India
About Timezones (Greenwich Mean Time)
+6
There are 25 integer World Time Zones from -12 through 0
(GMT) to +12. Each one is 15° of longitude as measured
East and West from the Prime Meridian of the World which
is at Greenwich, England. Some countries have adopted nonstandard time zones, usually a 30 minute offset.
+6:30
+8
CCT: China Coast
Shanghai, China
Hong Kong, China
Beijing, China
Each Time Zone is measured relative to Greenwich, England. Civilian designations (which are used for all HI 3000
Series Instruments) are typically three letter abbreviations
(e.g. EST) for most time zones. Below is a list of the abbreviated time zones with the GMT time adjustment. You will
see the time zone ranges in the e-mail header. Use Table 4-2
to determine your time zone and to set the Timezone for the
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC.
+9
JST: Japan Standard
Tokyo, Japan
Osaka, Japan
Taipei, Taiwan
Australian Central Standard
Darwin, Australia
Adelaide, Australia
Cocos Islands
+7
+9:30
+10
+10:30
GST: Guam Standard
Lord Howe Island
+11
+11:30
Norfolk Island
TABLE 4-2: GREENWICH TIME ZONES (GMT)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
GMT
+12
Civilian Time Zones
IDLE: International Date Line
East
NZST: New Zealand Standard
Cities
Wellington, NZ
Fiji
Marshall Islands
+13
Rawaki Island
+14
Line Islands
WEST OF GREENWICH
-1
WAT: West Africa
-2
AT: Azores
-3
Azores
Cape Verde Islands
Brasilia, Brazil
Buenos Aires, Argentina
Georgetown, Guyana
-3:30
44
designed to provide an interface through a single cable from
a programmable controller or PC directly to all HI 3000
Series products as well as smart devices such as sensors,
push buttons, motor starters, simple operator interfaces,
drives and other weight modules. With DeviceNet the user
can monitor or control multiple applications from one display and allows 3rd party I/O to be easily added to any system. You no longer have to hard-wire each device to an I/O
module or I/O block. The network also provides access to
the intelligence present in the instruments for superior diagnostics and troubleshooting to help increase system up time.
The DeviceNet network lets you monitor your plant-floor
devices from a central location and reconfigure them as your
needs change or service them as required. You can, for
example, configure the Filler/Dispenser modules for different applications.
Newfoundland
-4
AST: Atlantic Standard
Caracas, Venezuela
La Paz
-5
EST: Eastern Standard
Bogota, Colombia
Lima, Peru
New York, NY, USA
-6
CST: Central Standard
Chicago, Illinois, USA
Mexico City, Mexico
Saskatchewan, Canada
-7
MST: Mountain Standard
Phoenix, Arizona
Denver, Colorado
-8
Pacific Standard
Seattle, Washington
Portland, Oregon
San Francisco, CA
-9
YST: Yukon Standard
-10
AHST: Alaska-Hawaii Standard
CAT: Central Alaska
HST: Hawaii Standard
Anchorage, Alaska
Honolulu, Hawaii
-11
NT: Nome
Nome, Alaska
-12
IDLW: International Date Line
West
TABLE 4-2: GREENWICH TIME ZONES (GMT)
PARAMETER:DEVICENET BAUD RATE
RANGE: 125K, 250K, 500K
DEFAULT: 125K
PARAMETER:DEVICENET NODE ADDRESS
RANGE: 0-64
DEFAULT: 0
Step 1. Press the Down arrow until the cursor is in front of
DeviceNet. (See Fig. 4-91)
SETUP MENU
Set Cl ock
> Devicenet
Et her net
->
->
->
FIG. 4-91 SETUP MENU/DEVICENET
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The DeviceNet Menu
appears with cursor in front of Baud Rate. (See Fig.
4-92)
Step 18. Check Table 4-2 for the time zone you are in.
Step 19. Press the right or left arrow until the correct time
zone appears. For example Pacific Standard Time is
-8.
Step 20. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 21. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
DeviceNet Parameters
About the DeviceNet Parameters
DeviceNet is a low-level network designed to connect the
Filler/Dispenser to higher-level controllers such as PCs,
PLCs or embedded controllers.The DeviceNet Network is an
open, global industry-standard communication network
FIG. 4-92 DEVICENET MENU/BAUD RATE
Step 3. Press the right or left arrow buttons to select the
Baud Rate you want.
45
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
NOTE:
Check with your Network Administrator for the
Baud Rate if you don’t know the correct Baud
Rate.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 5. Press the Down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Node Address. (See Fig. 4-93)
By convention, the address is expressed as four decimal
numbers separated by periods, such as “200.1.2.3” representing the decimal value of each of the four bytes. Valid
addresses thus range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255, a total
of about 4.3 billion addresses.
It is recommended that you leave the Mask, Gate and DNS
settings alone. Contact your Network Administrator if you
need to set these parameters.
PARAMETER:ETHERNET
RANGE: 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
DEFAULT: 192.168.110.1
Step 1. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Ethernet. (See Fig. 4-94)
FIG. 4-93 DEVICENET MENU/NODE ADDRESS
Step 6. Press the right or left arrow buttons to select the
Node Address.
Step 7. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 8. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
Ethernet Parameters
FIG. 4-94 SETUP MENU/ETHERNET
About the Ethernet Parameters
All Filler/Dispensers are designed with a selectable 10/100
base T Ethernet connection which links your PC to an
embedded server in the instrument. You can connect to an
instrument via the Internet, Intranet, Extranet, or VPN (Virtual Private Network). Your computer must have an ethernet
card and cable with an RJ45 connector to connect to the
instrument. Once connected you can transfer data, monitor,
map and configure any of the instruments from your web
browser from any location in your plant or enterprise. Help
Dialogs are also available to assist when performing setup or
troubleshooting of an instrument. In addition the browser
connects you to the Hardy Web Site which connects the user
to a full range of customer service and support. File downloads from your control room are a snap. No more hauling
devices to download files to an instrument. Should you want
to download a file or monitor the instrument from your laptop at the site, simply connect a short cable from the lap top
to the Ethernet connect at the rear panel of the instrument to
transfer files, monitor or configure the instrument. No matter
where you are, if you are connected to our instrument you
can configure and troubleshoot the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser.
About IP Addresses
An IP address consists of 32 bits. It is composed of two
parts:
•
•
The Network Number
The Host Number
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Ethernet Menu appears
with the cursor in front of the IP Address. (See Fig.
4-95)
FIG. 4-95 ETHERNET MENU/IP ADDRESS WITH
DEFAULT IP ADDRESS
Step 3. Press the Clear button to clear the address.
NOTE:
Figure 4-96 has the Default IP address. You must
change this address when starting the instrument
for the first time.
Step 4. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the new
address. Remember there must be a period between
each port of the address. (e.g. 186.245.263.12)
Step 5. This is the only parameter you need to change. If
you need to change the other parameters, contact
your Network Administrator for assistance.
Step 6. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Step 7. Press the Exit button to return to the SETUP
MENU.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Step 8. Press the Exit button to return to the Standby Display.
This Completes the Configuration of the Instrument
from the Front Panel
Configuring the Filler/Dispenser from the Web
Browser
The Filler/Dispenser allows the user to configure the instrument from their Web Browser. It does not make any difference which browser you use. The only requirement is an
Ethernet Card, RJ45 connectors on each end of an Ethernet
Cable which is connected between to the Ethernet card in
your computer and to the RJ45 connection at the rear panel
of the Filler/Dispenser. See the HI 3000 Series Operation
and Installation Manual, Section Cabling/Installation for
installation and setup instructions.
FIG. 4-98 CONFIGURATION WEB PAGE
Step 1. Open your Web Browser.
Step 2. Type in the Instruments IP address in the Address
field of your browser. For example: “http://
159.236.456.25” (See Fig. 4-96) Do not enter the
quotation marks.
Step 3. Once the IP address is entered, press Enter on your
computer keyboard. The System Web page appears
and you are ready to use the instrument via the
Ethernet. (See Fig. 4-97)
FIG. 4-96 ENTER IP ADDRESS IN BROWSER
ADDRESS FIELD
FIG. 4-97 SYSTEM WEB PAGE
Step 4. Click on Configuration. (See Fig. 4-97) The Configuration Web Page appears. (See Fig. 4-98)
46
47
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Configuring Ingredients from the Browser
About Configuring Ingredients
You will notice that the Instrument # is displayed on the Web
page. You can configure from 1 - 12 Ingredients from the
Browser. Each ingredient can be given an Ingredient Name,
Set Tolerance (Discrete or Percent), Target Weight, and Preact. You can also configure the Gate Time, Jog On Time and
several other parameters. All these settings insure that each
ingredient is exactly configured to deliver the exact amount
of material for your filling process. The parameter ranges are
the same when setting the instrument from the Front Panel.
Step 1. Click on Adjust Ingredient. The Configuration Adjust Ingredient Page appears. (See Fig. 4-99)
FIG. 4-100 EDIT INGREDIENT PULL DOWN MENU
FIG. 4-99 CONFIGURATION - ADJUST
INGREDIENT WEB PAGE
Step 2. Click on the Ingredient Number pull down menu.
(See Fig. 4-100)
Step 3. Move the cursor over the Ingredient number you
want to adjust. When the cursor hovers above an
ingredient the ingredient is highlighted.
Step 4. With the cursor over the Ingredient number, click
on the selection.
Step 5. Click on the Edit Ingredient Button. The second
page of the Adjust Ingredient web pages appears.
(See Fig. 4-101)
FIG. 4-101 CONFIGURATION - ADJUST
INGREDIENT
Step 6. Lets stop a moment and look at this page (See Fig.
4-101). You see the Instrument ID in the upper left
hand corner of the graphic. The “Hardy Filler” tells
us that the instrument is a filler. If it was a Dispenser it would say “Hardy Dispenser” or if it was
an IBC Dispenser it would say “Hardy IBC Dispenser”. The Browser gets this information from
each instrument. You also see two arrows towards
the bottom of the page. These are navigation
arrows. To go forward click on the right arrow. To
go back, click on the left arrow.
Step 7. You also see Ingredient Number: 7 which we
selected in the previous web page. You can continue with this ingredient number or you can change
to another ingredient by clicking on the pull down
menu and selecting another ingredient number.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Changing the Ingredient Name
Click in the Ingredient Name: field. Click and hold the left
button down while moving the cursor over the Ingredient
name so that the Ingredient name is completely highlighted.
(See Fig. 4-102)
48
name so that the Ingredient name is completely highlighted. (See Fig. 4-104)
FIG. 4-104 CONFIGURATION/INGREDIENT NAME
CHANGE
FIG. 4-102 CONFIGURATION - PULL DOWN MENU
Step 9. Type in the new name. In our example we typed
“Flour”. (See Fig. 4-105)
FIG. 4-103 CONFIGURATION - ADJUST
INGREDIENT
Step 8. You also see Ingredient Number: 7 which you
selected in the previous web page. (See Fig. 4-103)
You can continue with this ingredient number or
you can change it by opening the pull down menu
again on this page and selecting another Ingredient
number.
Changing the Ingredient Name
Click in the Ingredient Name: field. Click and hold the left
button down while moving the cursor over the Ingredient
FIG. 4-105 CONFIGURATION/INGREDIENT NAME FLOUR
Step 10. Click on the Number of Fills. Double click in the
field so that the value is completely highlighted.
Step 11. Type in the number of fills you want for this ingredient.
Step 12. Click in the Target Wt. field. Click and hold the left
button down while moving the cursor over the Target weight value so that the Target weight is completely highlighted.
49
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 13. Type in the Target Weight you want for this ingredient.
Step 14. To turn On the Target Proof Limit Switch, click in
the “ON” radio button or to turn off the Target
Proof Limit Switch Click, click in the “Off” radio
button.
Step 15. If you turned the Target Proof Switch ON you need
to set the Gate Time.
Step 16. Double click in the Gate Time field to highlight the
value.
Step 17. Type in the new Gate Time parameter. The Gate
Time parameter is the time it takes for a proof
switch to detect that a Gate Opened or Closed. If
the time to open or close exceeds the Gate Time setting, a gate not open or gate not closed alarm
appears in the front panel of the instrument and on
the Monitor Page of the Web Browser.
Step 18. Double click in the Preact field to highlight the current value.
Step 19. Type in the new Preact Value.
Step 20. To turn on the Smart Auto Preact function, click in
the ON radio button.
Step 21. To set the Jog on Time:
•
•
•
Click on the jog count you want for your
process.
Step 24. Now that you have set all the parameters on this
web page, click on the Enter Parameters button to
set the entries.
Step 25. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the Web
page to go to the next page of the Adjust Ingredient
setup parameters. (See Fig. 4-107)
Double click in the Jog on Time field.
Type in the new time parameter.
Step 22. To set the Jog off time:
•
•
Double click in the Jog off Time field.
Type in the new time parameter.
Step 23. To set the Jog count
•
Click on the Jog Count pull down menu.
(See Fig. 4-106)
FIG. 4-106 SETTING JOG COUNT
FIG. 4-107 ADJUST INGREDIENT 7 PAGE 2
Step 26. Here again the Ingredient Number and the new
ingredient name Four are automatically selected.
Step 27. Double click in the Fill Timer field. Enter the new
Fill Time parameter.
Step 28. Double click in the Wait Timer field. Enter the new
Wait time parameter.
Step 29. Click on the Target Weight “Tolerance” pull down
menu to select Weight or Percentage for the Tolerance setting. (See Fig. 4-108) Click on Weight or
Percentage to select the parameter.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 4-108 TARGET WEIGHT TOLERANCE PULL
DOWN MENU
Step 30. If you choose weight:
•
•
Double click in the Min. Weight field and
enter the new Minimum target weight tolerance.
Double click in the Max. Weight field and
enter the new Maximum target weight tolerance.
50
FIG. 4-109 SPEED SELECTION
Step 33. Click on the Enter Parameters button to set the
entries.
Step 34. If you have more than one ingredient you want to
configure, go back to the previous page and select a
new ingredient and repeat the Ingredient Adjustment procedures. Continue this process until all the
ingredients you want to use in this fill have been
configured.
The Browser Ingredient Setup is Complete
Step 31. If you choose percentage:
Instrument Setup from the Browser
•
•
Double click in the Min. percent (%) field
and enter the new Minimum target weight
tolerance.
Double click in the Max. percent (%) field
and enter the new Maximum target weight
tolerance.
Step 1. From the Configuration page click on Instrument
Setup. (See Fig. 4-110) The Instrument Setup page
appears. (See Fig. 4-111)
Step 32. Click on the Speed pull down menu to select Single
or Dual Speed. (See Fig. 4-109)
FIG. 4-110 CONFIGURATION PAGE/SELECT
INSTRUMENT SETUP
51
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 6. To set the Scale Capacity, double click in the Scale
Capacity field and enter the scale capacity of the
scale you are using in your process.
Step 7. To set the Grad Size:
•
•
Click on the Grad Size pull down menu.
(See Fig. 4-113)
Click on the Grad Size you want for your
process.
FIG. 4-111 INSTRUMENT SETUP FILLER
Step 2. To change the Instrument ID, double click in the
Instrument ID field and enter the new ID.
Step 3. To change the Operator ID, double click in the
Operator ID field and enter the new ID. Remember
you are limited to three characters.
Step 4. To select the Units of Measure, click on the Units of
Measure pull down menu. (See Fig. 4-112)
Step 5. Click on the units you want for your process.
FIG. 4-113 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SELECTING
GRAD SIZE
Step 8. To set the Decimal Point position:
•
•
FIG. 4-112 UNITS OF MEASURE
Click on the Decimal Point pull down
menu. (See Fig. 4-114)
Click on the Decimal Point position you
want for your process.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
52
Step 12. To turn the OK to Fill Input ON, click in the OK to
Fill Input ON radio button. To turn the OK to Fill
Input OFF, click in the OK to Fill Input OFF radio
button.
Step 13. To adjust the OK to Fill Timer, double click in the
OK to Fill Timer field and enter the new time.
Step 14. Click on the Set Parameters button to set the
entries.
Step 15. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page to
go to Instrument Setup page 2. (See Fig. 4-116)
FIG. 4-114 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SELECTING THE
DECIMAL POINT POSITION
Step 9. To turn ON the Totalizer click in the On radio button. To turn OFF the Totalizer click in the OFF
radio button.
Step 10. To set the Total Decimal Point Position:
•
•
Click on the Total Decimal Point pull
down menu. (See Fig. 4-115)
Click on the Total Decimal Point position
you want for your process.
FIG. 4-116 INSTRUMENT SETUP/PAGE 2
Step 16. To set the Zero Tolerance, double click in the Zero
Tolerance field and enter a new Zero Tolerance
parameter.
Step 17. To turn ON Use Auto-Zero (Tolerance) click in the
Use Auto-Zero ON radio button. To turn OFF Use
Auto-Zero (Tolerance) click in the Use Auto-Zero
OFF radio button.
Step 18. To set the Auto - Zero Tolerance, double click in the
Auto - Zero Tolerance field and enter a new Auto Zero Tolerance parameter.
Step 19. To set the Auto - Zero Time, double click in the
Auto - Zero Time field and enter a new Auto - Zero
Time parameter.
Step 20. To set the Tare Limit, double click in the Tare Limit
field and enter a new Tare Limit parameter.
Step 21. To set WAVERSAVER®:
•
FIG. 4-115 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SETTING TOTAL
DECIMAL POINT POSITION
Step 11. To set the Motion Tolerance, double click in the
Motion Tolerance field and enter the new Motion
Tolerance parameter.
•
Click on the WAVERSAVER pull down
menu. (See Fig. 4-117)
Click on the WAVERSAVER setting you
want for your process.
53
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Discharge Parameters
FIG. 4-117 INSTRUMENT SETUP PAGE 2/SETTING
WAVERSAVER
Step 22. To set the entries for page 2, click on the Save
Parameters button.
Step 23. Click on right arrow at the bottom of the page. The
Refill and Discharge Setup page appears. (See Fig.
4-118)
Step 1. To turn ON Discharge click in the Discharge ON
radio button. To turn OFF Discharge click in the
Discharge OFF radio button.
Step 2. To turn ON Auto Discharge click in the Auto Discharge ON radio button. To turn OFF Auto Discharge click in the Auto Discharge OFF radio
button.
Step 3. To turn ON OK to Discharge click in the OK to
Discharge ON radio button. To turn OFF OK to
Discharge click in the OK to Discharge OFF radio
button.
Step 4. To turn ON Discharge Gate Proof Switch, click in
the Discharge Gate Proof ON radio button. To turn
OFF Discharge Gate Proof Switch, click in the Discharge Gate Proof OFF radio button.
Step 5. To set the Discharge Gate Timer, double click in the
Discharge Gate Timer field and enter the new time.
Step 6. To set the OK to Discharge Timer, double click in
the OK to Discharge Timer field and enter the new
time.
Step 7. To set the Refill and Discharge parameters click on
the Save Parameters button.
Step 8. Click on the right arrow at the bottom of the page.
Step 9. The Serial Port Setup page appears. (See Fig. 4119)
FIG. 4-118 INSTRUMENT SETUP/REFILL AND
DISCHARGE PAGE
Refill Parameters
FIG. 4-119 INSTRUMENT SETUP/PRINTER PORT
Step 1. To turn ON Refill click in the Refill ON radio button. To turn OFF Refill click in the Refill OFF radio
button.
Step 2. To turn ON Initial Refill click in the Initial Refill
ON radio button. To turn OFF Initial Refill click in
the Initial Refill OFF radio button.
Serial Port Parameters
Step 1. To select the Serial Port device:
•
•
Click on the Serial port pull down menu.
(See Fig. 4-120)
Click on the Serial Port device you want
for your process. For our example we
selected the Printer Port.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Step 2. To turn ON Auto Print click on the pull down menu
and click on ON. To turn OFF Auto Print click on
the pull down menu and click on OFF.
Step 3. To select the Baud Rate:
•
•
54
Step 5. To select the Data Bits:
•
•
Click on the Data Bits pull down menu.
(See Fig. 4-122)
Click on the Data Bits you want for your
process.
Click on the Baud Rate pull down menu.
(See Fig. 4-120)
Click on the Baud Rate you want for your
process.
FIG. 4-122 PRINTER PORT SETUP/DATA BITS
FIG. 4-120 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SERIAL PORT
Step 6. Click on the Save Parameters button to set the
entries.
Step 7. Click on the right button. The Set Date/Clock page
appears. (See Fig. 4-123)
Step 4. To select the Parity:
•
•
Click on the Parity pull down menu. (See
Fig. 4-121)
Click on the Parity you want for your process.
FIG. 4-123 INSTRUMENT SETUP/SET DATE/SET
CLOCK/SET TIMEZONE
Set Date/Clock Parameters
FIG. 4-121 PRINTER PORT SETUP/PARITY
Step 1. Double click in the Minute-mm field. Enter the current minutes.
Step 2. Double click in the Hour-hh field. Enter the current
minutes.
Step 3. Double click in the Day-dd field. Enter the current
day.
55
CHAPTER 4
Configuration
Step 4. Double click in the Month-mm field. Enter the current month.
Step 5. Double click in the Year-yyyy field. Enter the Current year.
Step 6. Double click in the Timezone field. Check Table 42 Civilian Time Zones, GMT on page 40 for the
time zone you are in. Enter the correct Greenwich
Mean Time value. Don’t forget to enter the positive
(+) or negative (-) sign. For our example we used
the default time zone which is -8 or PST (Pacific
Standard Time).
Step 7. Click on the Save Parameters button to save the settings.
Step 5. Press the Enter button. The Smart Diagnostics Card
Menu appears. (See Fig. 126)
The Browser Instrument Setup is Complete
Step 6. Press the right arrow button to toggle between ON
and OFF. In our example we enabled Channel 1.
(See Fig. 127)
Options Configuration
S. D. CARDMENU
> Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
FIG. 4-126 SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD MENU/
CHANNELS 1,2,3
Smart Diagnostics (-SD) Card Configuration from
the Front Panel
S. D. CARDMENU
NOTE:
> Channel 1
For Installation instructions, go to Chapter 3 Installing the Smart Diagnostics Card.
Step 1. From the Main Menu press the Setup/3 button. The
Configuration Menu appears.
Step 2. Press the Down Arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Options. (See Fig. 124)
CONFIGURATIONMENU
CALIBRATION
> OPTIONS
I/ OMAPPING
Channel 2
Channel 3
ON
OFF
OFF
FIG. 4-127 SMART DIAGNOSTICS/ENABLING
CHANNEL 1
Step 7. To see Channel 4, press the down arrow button until
Channel 4 appears. (See Fig. 128)
->
->
->
FIG. 4-124 CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING
OPTIONS
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The Options Menu appears.
(See Fig. 125)
OPTIONS
Contr ol net I/ O
Pr ofibus I/ O
> Smar t Diag. Ctr l .
OFF
OFF
OFF
->
->
->
FIG. 4-125 OPTIONS/SELECTING SMART
DIAGNOSTICS CONTROL
Step 4. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Smart Diag. Ctrl. (See Fig. 125)
S. D. CARDMENU
> Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
ON
ON
ON
FIG. 4-128 SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD MENU/
CHANNEL 2,3,4
Step 8. Continue to enable the channels you want for your
process.
Step 9. Press the Enter button to save the entries.
Step 10. Press the Exit button to return to the Main Menu.
Smart Diagnostics Card Configuration from the
Web Browser
Step 1. From the Home Page click on Configuration. (See
Fig. 129) The Configuration Page appears. (See
Fig. 130)
Step 2. Click on Options. (See Fig. 130) The Configuration
Options page appears. (See Fig. 131)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 4-129 HOME PAGE/SELECTING
CONFIGURATION
56
FIG. 4-132 SMART DIAGNOSTIC CARD
CONFIGURATION
Step 4. To enable the channels you want to use in your process, click on the radio buttons next to ON. (See
Fig. 132) In our illustration we have actuated all 4
channels.
Step 5. To disable the channels click on the radio buttons
next to OFF. (See Fig. 132)
Step 6. Click on the Save Parameters button to save the
configuration.
NOTE:
FIG. 4-130 CONFIGURATION PAGE/SELECT
OPTIONS
FIG. 4-131 CONFIGURATION OPTIONS/
SELECTING SMART DIAGNOSTICS CARD
CONFIGURATION
Step 3. Click on Smart diagnostic card configuration. (See
Fig. 64) The Configuration/Smart Diagnostics Card
appears. (See Fig. 132)
To use the Smart Diagnostics Option for troubleshooting a Filling/Dispensing/IBC system, go to
Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting, Using Smart Diagnostics from the Front Panel.
57
CHAPTER 5
Calibration
CHAPTER 5: CALIBRATION
About Chapter 5
Chapter 5 pertains to the calibration procedures for the
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser. Alternatives to any procedures
implied or explicitly contained in this chapter are not recommended. In order for the Filler/Dispenser to work properly, it
must be calibrated prior to operation. Be sure to follow all
the procedures completely to insure that the weights read by
the Filler/Dispenser are accurate. It is very important that the
user and service personnel be familiar with the procedures
contained in this chapter, before installing or operating the
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser.
Getting Started
The HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser can be calibrated two ways.
The first is the Hardy C2® Second Generation calibration
which requires no test weights. Hardy C2® Calibration is
one of the Core Technologies. We will describe the C2 Calibration process in this chapter. The second calibration technique is called the traditional calibration which requires
certified test weights. It is important to note that the procedures contained in this section either explicitly stated or
implied should be followed to guarantee the performance of
the instrument. Alternatives to the procedures listed here are
not recommended.
Before you can calibrate the instrument you first need to
check to see if the system is ready to be calibrated.
FIG. 5-1 PROPERLY INSTALLED LOAD CELL
WITH NO BINDING
Electrical Check Procedures
Step 1. Check to see that there is power to the controller.
a.
Binding
b.
If there is power to the controller The front
panel display should be lit.
If the display appears with a value the unit is
ready for calibration.
Step 1. Due a visual check to see if the load cells have been
installed so that nothing is binding the load cell or
other parts of the weighing system. Make sure that
nothing is draped over the scale or vessel such as a
hose, electrical cord, tubes or other objects.
Step 2. Check to see that all communication and power
cables are securely fastened to the connectors on
the rear panel.
CAUTION:
C2 Calibration From the Front Panel
BINDING ON A SCALE/VESSEL OR LOAD CELL
DOES NOT ALLOW THE LOAD CELL FREE VERTICAL MOVEMENT AND MAY PREVENT THE INSTRUMENT FROM RETURNING TO THE ORIGINAL ZERO REFERENCE POINT.
Step 2. Check to see that the load cell is mounted so that
100% of the load (Vessel with Contents) vertically
passes through the load cell. (See Fig. 5-1)
Step 1. Press the Setup/3 button. The Configuration Menu
appears. (See Fig. 5-2)
Step 2. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
CALIBRATION. (See Fig. 5-2)
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The CALIBRATION Menu
appears with the cursor in front of CAL TYPE C2.
(See Fig. 5-3)
NOTE:
If the cursor is in front of CAL TYPE TRAD,
press the left or right arrow buttons until CAL
TYPE C2 appears.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
>
FIG. 5-2 CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING
SETUP
>
CALIBRATION
Sensor Type
Cal Type
0- 3mV/ V1
C2 - - >
C2 CAL
Load Sensor s
Ref Point
Gr avit y
1
0.00
1.00
FIG. 5-5 C2 CALIBRATION SUB-MENU
Step 9. The Load Sensor number is a read only field. It tells
you how many load sensors are connected to the
instrument.
Step 10. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of the Ref Point. (See Fig. 5-6)
a.
b.
FIG. 5-3 CALIBRATION MENU/C2 CAL
CAUTION: FOR HARDY ADVANTAGE AND ADVANTAGE
LITE C2 LOAD CELLS YOU MUST SELECT 0-3MV/V ONLY.
SELECTING OTHER SENSOR TYPES WILL CREATE INCORRECT WEIGHT READINGS.
58
NOTE:
The Reference Point is the total live load that
is currently on the scale.
If you have nothing on the scale the Ref
Point is 0. If you have 5 lbs live load on the
scale the Ref Point is 5.
Normally the scale system is clean and ready to
receive product. This step establishes the gross
zero reference.
There are four (4) Sensor Type choices:
•
•
•
•
Step 4.
Step 5.
Step 6.
Step 7.
0-3mV/V - C2 Load Sensors Only
± 3mV/V - Non C2 Load Sensors
0-120mV/V - LVDT Type Load Sensors
± 120mV/V - LVDT Type Load Sensors
Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front
of Sensor Type.
If the Sensor Type reads anything other than 03mV/V, use the left or right arrow to select 03mV/V.
Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front
of Cal Type. (See Fig. 5-4)
If TRAD is visible press the right or left arrow
until C2 appears.
>
C2 CAL
Load Sensor s
Ref Point
Gr avit y
1
0.00
1.00
FIG. 5-6 ENTERING THE REFERENCE POINT
Step 11. Press the Clr (Clear) button to clear the entry.
Step 12. Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the weight
that is currently on the scale, typically zero.
Step 13. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Gravity. (See Fig. 5-7)
About The Gravitation Correction Factor
>
CALIBRATION
Sensor Type
Cal Type
0- 3mV/ V1
C2 - - >
FIG. 5-4 CALIBRATION/SELECTING CAL TYPE
Step 8. Press the Enter button. The C2 CAL Sub-menu
appears. (See Fig. 5-5)
Objects weigh less (about 0.5%) at the equator then they weigh
at each pole because the force of gravity is less at the equator
then at the North or South Pole. This is due in part to the effect
of the earth’s rotation and the shape of the earth at the equator.
Therefore objects at the equator are 21 Km further from the
Earth’s center than objects at the poles. For example if you
weigh 100 pounds at the North Pole on a spring scale you weigh
99.65 pounds at the equator. Depending on the latitude of your
location you would weigh somewhere in between. For those
who need the gravity correction factor you can set it here. The
table below shows the gravitation correction factor. In various
59
CHAPTER 5
Calibration
cities around the world. Mexico City (1.002102) is the lowest
and Oslo (0.998726) and Helsinki (1.001405) are the highest.
Table 1: Gravity Correction Factors
CITY
GRAV.
ACCEL
CITY
0.999369
Los Angeles
1.001028
Athens
1.000684
Madrid
1.000461
Auckland
NZ
1.000782
Manila
1.000461
Bangkok
1.002392
Mexico City
1.002102
Brussels
0.999503
New York
1.000433
Buenos
Aires
1.001004
Oslo
0.998726
Calcutta
1.00191
Ottawa
1.000007
Cape Town
1.00104
Paris
0.999048
Chicago
0.99922
Rio de Janeiro
1.001884
Copenhagen
0.999075
Rome
1.000326
Nicosia
1.00093
San Francisco
1.000702
Jakarta
1.002631
Singapore
0.99877
Frankfurt
0.999579
Sydney
1.00104
Istanbul
1.000406
Taipei
1.001741
Havana
1.001872
Tokyo
1.000886
Helsinki
1.001405
Vancouver BC
0.999653
Kuwait
1.001405
Washington
DC
1.000601
Lisbon
1.000615
Wellington NZ
0.999399
London
0.999445
Zurich
0.999821
In general if your location is between the 45th parallel and
the equator the gravity correction is greater than 1.0.
Because the gravity is less at these attitudes you are adding,
for example 1.006 for an error that is .06%. For locations
between the 45th parallel and the North or South Pole your
correction factor is less than 1.0, for example .9994 for an
error that is -.06%.
NOTE:
0.00
1.00
GRAV.
ACCEL
Amsterdam
NOTE:
>
C2 CAL
Ref Point
Gr avit y
Do C2 Cal ibr at ion
FIG. 5-7 GRAVITY CORRECTION FACTOR
Step 14. Press the Clear button to clear the entry. (See Fig. 58)
>
0.00
FIG. 5-8 GRAVITY/CLEARING ENTRY
Step 15. From the Gravity Corrector Factors table select the
city correction factor closest to your location.
Step 16. Use the keypad to enter the selected value. In our
example we entered 1.002102 which is the correction factor for Mexico City. (See Fig. 5-9)
>
C2 CAL
Ref Point
Gr avit y
Do C2 Cal ibr at ion
0.00
1.002102
FIG. 5-9 GRAVITY CORRECTION FACTOR/
MEXICO CITY
Step 17. Press the Enter button to save the setting.
Step 18. Press the down arrow button to move the cursor in
front of Do C2 Calibration. (See Fig. 5-10)
Step 19. Wait 15 seconds for the scale to settle.
Step 20. Press the Enter button to complete the Calibration.
You must perform a C2 Calibration after setting
the Gravity Correction factor or the correction
factor won’t work.
If you do not want to set the Gravity Correction
Factor go to Step 14.
C2 CAL
Ref Point
Gr avit y
Do C2 Cal ibr at ion
>
C2 CAL
Ref Point
Gr avit y
Do C2 Cal ibr at ion
0.00
1.002102
FIG. 5-10 DO C2 CALIBRATION
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
60
Step 21. A “function OK” momentarily appears on the
screen indicating the calibration was successful
•
•
A message that says “Function Error” means
that the calibration was not successful.
Check Chapter 7 - Troubleshooting of this
manual for corrective action.
Another message may occur which is: Security Violation. This means that the User does
not have the security level required to do a
calibration.
Step 22. Press the Exit button until you return to the Standby
display.
Step 23. C2 calibration is complete.
C2 Calibration From the Web Page
Step 1. On the Filler/Dispenser Home Page Click on Configuration. (See Fig. 5-11) The Configuration page
appears. (See Fig. 5-12)
FIG. 5-12 CONFIGURATION PAGE
Step 2. Click on Calibration. The Calibration Sub-menu
appears. (See Fig. 5-13)
FIG. 5-11 CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING
SETUP
FIG. 5-13 C2 CALIBRATION SUB-MENU
Step 3. The Load Sensor number is a read only field. It tells
you how many load sensors are connected to the
instrument. If this number does not reflect with the
actual number of load sensors go to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
Step 4. To choose the type of sensor for this instrument
click on the pull down list next to Sensor Type. (See
Fig. 5-14)
61
CHAPTER 5
Calibration
Step 10. To enter the Gravity Correction Factor, get the factor value from the Gravity Correction Factors table
on pages 58 and 59.
Step 11. Double click in the Gravity Correction Factor field.
(See Fig. 5-14)
Step 12. Type in the value. In our example we entered
1.002102 which is the Gravity Correction Factor for
Mexico City.
Step 13. Enter the value you selected from the table
Step 14. Click on the Do C2 Calibration button.
Step 15. A page telling you that the C2 Calibration completed OK appears. (See Fig. 5-15)
FIG. 5-14 SENSOR TYPE PULL DOWN LIST
Step 5. Click on the Sensor type you are using for this
application. In our example we selected 0-3mV/V
sensors.
Step 6. Click on the Save button to save the selection.
Step 7. To enter the Reference Weight click in the Reference Weight field. (See Fig. 5-15)
FIG. 5-16 CAL COMPLETED OK
Step 16. Click on “Back” to return to the Calibration page.
Step 17. Click on “Home” to return to the Filler/Dispenser
Home page.
Step 18. C2 calibration is complete.
Traditional Calibration From the Front
Panel
About Traditional Calibration
FIG. 5-15 C2 CALIBRATION/ENTERING
REFERENCE WEIGHT
NOTE:
The Reference Point 3.000 is for demonstration
purposes only. The recommended Reference
Point should be 0.000.
a.
b.
Step 1. Press the Setup/3 button. The Configuration Menu
appears. (See Fig. 5-16)
The Reference Point is the total weight that
is currently on the scale.
If you have nothing on the scale the Ref
Point is 0. If you have 5 lbs on the scale the
Ref Point is 5.
Step 8. To clear the entry, move the cursor over the current
reference weight which highlights the weight value.
Step 9. Use your keyboard to type in the new value. In our
example we entered 3.00. (See Fig. 5-15)
NOTE:
Traditional Calibration is the method of calibration that uses
test weights. We recommend that the test weights total 80 to
100% of the scale live load capacity.
If you do not want to enter a Gravity Correction
Factor go on to Step 14.
FIG. 5-17 CONFIGURATION MENU/CALIBRATION
Step 2. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
CALIBRATION. (See Fig. 5-17)
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The CALIBRATION Menu
appears with the C2 Cal Type. (See Fig. 5-18)
NOTE:
If the CALIBRATIN MENU appears with Cal
Type, TRAD go to Step 5.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
>
CALIBRATION
Sensor Type
Cal Type
62
0- 3mV/ V1
C2 - - >
FIG. 5-18 CALIBRATION MENU
FIG. 5-21 DO TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/ZERO
Step 4. Press the Right or Left arrow buttons to select Traditional Calibration. (See Fig. 5-19)
Step 8. Press the Enter button to do the Zero Calibration. If
“Function OK” appears the Zero Calibration is
complete If an ERR number appears go to Chapter
7, Troubleshooting for more information.
Step 9. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of Span Value. (See Fig. 5-22) To Set the Span
Value:
>
CALIBRATION
Sensor Type
Cal Type
0- 3mV/ V1
TRAD - - >
FIG. 5-19 CALIBRATION/TRADITIONAL
Step 5. Press the Enter Button. The Traditional Cal Menu
appears with the cursor in front of Zero Value. (See
Fig. 5-19)
FIG. 5-22 TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/SPAN
VALUE
•
•
NOTE:
FIG. 5-20 TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/ZERO
VALUE
Step 6. Traditional Calibration requires a zero point and the
physical placement of test weights on the scale. To
Set the Zero Value:
•
Place a certified test weight on the scale.
Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter the
value of the test weight. (If a 10 lb.weight
is used, enter 10).
Ideally the test weight used for the span should be
the highest weight that will be measured in the
application.
•
Wait 12 seconds or more.
Step 10. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of the Do Trad Cal. (See Fig. 5-23)
Remove all weight "live load" from the
scale. The Zero Value should be 0.00.
CAUTION: THE SCALE MUST BE EMPTY.
•
NOTE:
Wait 12 seconds or more.
Zero Ct. is read only and is used to Troubleshoot
the instrument.
FIG. 5-23 TRADITIONAL CALIBRATION/SPAN
Step 7. Press the Down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of the Do Trad Cal. (See Fig. 5-21)
Step 11. Press the Enter button to do the Span Calibration. If
“Function OK” appears the Span Calibration is
63
CHAPTER 5
Calibration
complete If an ERR number appears go to Chapter
7, Troubleshooting for more information.
Step 12. End of Calibration
Traditional Calibration From the Web Page
Step 1.
On the Filler/Dispenser Home Page Click on
Configuration. (See Fig. 5-24) The Configuration page appears. (See Fig. 5-25)
FIG. 5-26 CALIBRATION SUB-MENU
Step 4.
Step 5.
FIG. 5-24 CONFIGURATION MENU/SELECTING
SETUP
Step 6.
Step 7.
Step 8.
Step 9.
If the Traditional Calibration - Low Step Reference is any value other than 0.0000 go to Step 5
otherwise go to Step 10.
To clear the entry, move the cursor over the current Reference Weight which highlights the
weight value.
Use your keyboard to type in the new 0.0000
(See Fig. 5-25)
Wait 12 seconds or more.
Click on the Do Cal Low button.
A page telling you that the Do Cal Low Calibration completed OK. (See Fig. 5-26)
FIG. 5-27 CAL LOW COMPLETED OK
FIG. 5-25 CONFIGURATION PAGE
Step 2.
Step 3.
Click on Calibration. The Calibration Sub-menu
appears. (See Fig. 5-25)
Select the Sensor type connected to this instrument.
Step 10. Click on “Back” to return to the Calibration page.
Step 11. Place a certified test weight on the scale.
Step 12. To enter the Span Weight click in the Span Weight
field. (See Fig. 5-25)
Step 13. To clear the entry, move the cursor over the current
Span Weight which highlights the weight value.
Step 14. Use you keyboard to type in the new value. In our
example we entered 10.00. (See Fig. 5-25)
Step 15. Wait 12 seconds or more.
Step 16. Click on the Do Cal High button.
Step 17. A page telling you that the Do Cal High Calibration
completed OK. (See Fig. 5-28)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 5-28 CAL HIGH COMPLETED OK
Step 18. Click on “Home” to return to the Filler/Dispenser
Home page.
Step 19. Traditional calibration is complete.
64
65
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
CHAPTER 6: MAPPING
About Mapping
Mapping is a simple process where you connect an input
(Source) to an output (Destination). The HI 3010 has four
output Relays and five Input Contacts. You can also map
parameter values to and from these outputs and inputs. The
benefit of Mapping is that it requires no programming.
NOTE:
The HI 3000 Series Operation and Installation
Manual provides additional mapping help.
NOTE:
Data is handled based on the method used writing data to the unit. If data is written using the
Command Interface (See Below) the data is interpreted based on the displayed units. However, if
data is directly mapped into the unit, the unit
assumes lbs (pounds) and converts the entered
data to the displayed units.
Mapping to an HI 3010 with a pre-2.3 Firmware Version
HI 3010’s with firmware versions older than 2.3 send UDP
packets with data at fixed locations. Some of these words
correspond to words contained in the 2.3+ version, Hardy
Control-Link Table as shown below:
2.3 Word
In Assignment Statement form this mapping would look like
this:
•
•
Destination = Source or
Output Relay #1 = Fast Fill
From the Web Browser let’s go through the process:
Step 1. From the Filler/Dispenser
Home Page click on Configuration. (See Fig. 6-1) The Configuration Page appears. (See Fig.
6-2)
FIG. 6-1 HOME PAGE/SELECTING
CONFIGURATION
Step 2. Click on Mapping Setup. (See Fig. 6-2) The Configuration Mapping Setup Page appears. All the
pull down menus include all the Destinations for
the HI 3010. (See Fig. 6-3)
Pre 2.3 Contents
0
HI0, digital inputs
1
HI1, Status Word
2
HI2, State Machine Output Word 0
3
HI3, Alarms Word 0
4
HI4, Alarms Word 1
5&6
Gross Wt., Floating Point
7&8
Net Wt., Floating Point
9
Packet Sequence Number
TABLE 6-1: HI 3010
Therefore a version 2.3+ HI 3010 can pick up Gross Wt from
a pre-2.3 HI 3010 node, let’s say Node 7 from 7FI5. Net
Weight at 7FI7. State Machine output word HI2 at 7SI2.
Alarm word 0 at 7SI3.
Mapping to an Output Relay
In English we might say: “Connect the Ingredient Fast Fill
Command to Relay Output #1.
•
Relay Output #1 is the Destination.
•
Fast Fill is the Source.
FIG. 6-2 CONFIGURATION PAGE/SELECTING
MAPPING SETUP
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
•
NOTE:
Step 3. Let’s take a moment to take a look at this page.
•
•
Local Outputs include the 4 Output
Relays.
Control includes parameters that control
the filling or dispensing which includes
the following which is only a partial list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
Instrument Setup include parameters for
setting up the instrument itself and
includes the following which is only a partial list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
Zero Weight
Span Weight
Scratchpad which are empty registers you
can do whatever you want with.
The lists above do not include all the parameters.
For a list of all the parameters and their
addresses please see Appendix A.
Step 4. Back to our example. We want to select Output
Relay #1 as our destination. Click on the Local Outputs pull down menu. (See Fig. 6-4)
Step 5. Click on Output Relay. After you click on Output
Relay it is selected and a Number and a Select button appear to the right of the Local Outputs pull
down menu. (See Fig. 6-4)
Step 6. To select Output Relays from 1 - 4, double click in
the text box and type in the Output Relay number
you want. In our example we selected Output Relay
#1. (See Fig. 6-4)
Auto Zero On
Tare Value
Zero Tolerance
Discharge On
Ingredient Setup include parameters for
setting up the ingredients to fill or dispense, and includes the following which is
only a partial list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
OK to Fill,
OK to Discharge
Start
Stop
Send E-Mail
Custom Text
Calibration includes calibration parameters:
1.
2.
FIG. 6-3 CONFIGURATION MAPPING SETUP 1/
SELECTING A DESTINATION
Hardy Control-Link Text Out
Hardy Control-Link Int Out
DeviceNet Text Out
DeviceNet Int Out
E-Mail includes E-Mail Outputs such as:
1.
2.
•
66
Max Weight.
Min Weight
Fill Time
Wait Time
Network includes the network outputs for
Hardy Control Link, ControlNet, DeviceNet, Profibus etc. which is only a partial
list.
FIG. 6-4 LOCAL OUTPUT/SELECTING OUTPUT
RELAY #1
Step 7. Click on the Select button to the right of the Relay
#1 text box. An address appears in the Current
Mappings text box below. You will have to scroll
67
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
3.
4.
down to see it. In our example we selected Output
Relay #1 which has an address of: HO0.0. An equal
“=” sign also appears.
•
Ingredient Setup include parameters for
setting up the ingredients to fill or discharge, and includes the following which
is only a partial list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
FIG. 6-5 OUTPUT RELAY #1 ADDRESS HO0.0
•
Step 8. You have now selected the Destination.
Step 9. Click on the Jump to Sources Page button to select
the Source you want for this destination. (See Fig.
6-5) The Configuration, Mapping Setup 2 page
appears. (See Fig. 6-6)
Step 10. Let’s take a moment to look at this page.
•
•
Local Inputs include the 5 input contact
closures provided by the HI 3010.
Control includes the following which is
only a partial list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
Zero Tolerance
Auto Zero Tolerance
•
NOTE:
Gross Weight
Net Weight
Totalizer Total Weight
Totalizer Cycles Weight
Calibration includes calibration parameters:
1.
2.
3.
Slow Fill
Fast Fill
Refill
Discharge
Instrument Setup includes parameters for
setting up the instrument itself and
includes the following which is only a partial list:
1.
2.
•
Hardy Control-Link Short In
Hardy Control-Link Int Out
DeviceNet Text Out
DeviceNet Int In
Process Data includes data parameters
such as the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
FIG. 6-6 CONFIGURATION - MAPPING SETUP 2
Motion
Lost OK to Fill
ADC Error
Lost OK to Dispense
Network includes the network outputs and
inputs for Hardy Control Link, ControlNet, DeviceNet, Profibus etc. which is
only a partial list.
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
Auto Preact On
Fills
Fill Time
Slow Gate Time
Alarms includes all the alarms for filling
and discharging and includes the following
which is only a partial list:
1.
2.
3.
4.
•
Waversaver
Tare Limit Value
Zero Weight
Span Weight
Calibration Type
Scratchpad which are empty registers you
can do whatever you want with.
The lists above do not include all the parameters.
For a list of all the parameters and their
addresses please see Appendix A.
Step 11. Back to our example. We want to select Fast Fill
which is a control parameter. Click on the Control
pull down menu. (See Fig. 6-7)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
68
Step 12. Click on “Fast Fill”. A Select button appears to the
right of the Control pull down menu. (See Fig. 6-8)
FIG. 6-10 MAPPED FAST FILL TO OUTPUT RELAY
#1
Example #2 Mapping to an Input
There are 5 contact closure inputs designed into the HI 3010.
You want to map Input Contact #4 to OK to Fill. Our Assignment Statement is:
•
•
FIG. 6-7 CONTROL PULL DOWN MENU/
SELECTING FAST FILL
Destination = Source
Ok to Fill (HO1.4) = Input #4 (HI0.3)
Step 1. On the Configuration - Mapping Setup 1 page click
on the Control pull down menu. (See Fig. 6-11)
FIG. 6-8 SELECTING FAST FILL SOURCE
FIG. 6-11 DESTINATIONS/SELECTING OK TO FILL
Step 13. Click on the Select button to select Fast Fill as the
Source. (See Fig. 6-8)
Step 2. Click on Ok to Fill. A Select button appears. (See
Fig. 6-11)
Step 3. Click on the Select button. (See Fig. 6-11)
FIG. 6-9 MAPPING IS COMPLETE
Step 14. The Assignment Statement is complete. You will
now see in the Current Mappings text box:
HO0.0=HI2.1 (See Fig. 6-9)
Step 15. Click on the Map button. You have now mapped
Fast Fill to Output Relay #1. Notice that the new
mapping is included in the list of current mappings.
(See Fig. 6-10)
FIG. 6-12 OK TO FILL (HO1.4) SELECTED AS A
DESTINATION
Step 4. Click on the Jump to Sources Page button. The
Configuration - Mapping Setup 2 page appears.
(See Fig. 6-13)
69
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
gized, depending on what you want the relay to do. Here’s
the process:
Step 1. From the Configuration - Mapping Setup #1 page,
click on the Local Output pull down menu and
select Output Relay. (See Fig. 15)
Step 2. In the Relay# text field type number 3. (See Fig. 615)
FIG. 6-13 CONFIGURATION - MAPPING SETUP #2
PAGE/SELECTING LOCAL INPUT #4 AS THE
SOURCE
Step 5. Click on the Local Inputs pull down menu. Click on
Local Inputs. An Input# text box appears with a
Select button to the right. (See Fig. 6-13)
Step 6. Double Click in the Input# text box and type in the
number 4.
Step 7. Click on the Select button.
Step 8. The Mapping Assignment Statement is complete.
(See Fig. 6-14) OK to Fill (HO1.4) = Input contact
#4 (HI0.3)
FIG. 6-15 MAPPING SETUP #1 PAGE/SELECTING
OUTPUT RELAY #3
Step 3. Click on the Select button to select the Destination Output Relay #3.
FIG. 6-14 COMPLETED ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT
Step 9. Click on the Map button. The Input Contact #4 is
now mapped to Ok to Fill.
Mapping Multiple Sources
Now that you know how to map a single source to a destination we can move onto multiple sources mapping. Lets say
you want to energize or de-energize Output Relay #3 if the
filling process might experience an overfill or a slow gate
stuck shut alarm. The overfill alarm means that the fill
resulted in excess ingredient(s). The slow gate stuck shut
alarm means the fill gate is stuck closed. You want one Output Relay to energize or de-energize if either one of these
conditions exists. Lets map the multiple sources to Output
Relay #3.
Our Assignment Statement looks like this:
Destination = Source 1 + Source 2
Output Relay #3 = Overfill Alarm + Slow Gate Stuck Shut
Alarm
In this Assignment Statement we use a boolean operator. “+”
in boolean Assignment Statements mean “or”. This means
that if either the Overfill Alarm “or” the Slow Gate Stuck
Shut Alarm occur, Relay #3 will be energized or de-ener-
FIG. 6-16 OUTPUT RELAY #3 (HO0.2) ENTERED IN
THE ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT AS A
DESTINATION
Step 4. Click on the “Jump to Sources Page” button. (See
Fig. 6-16) The Mapping Setup #2 Page appears.
(See Fig. 6-17)
FIG. 6-17 ALARMS/SELECTING OVERFILL ALARM
Step 5. Click on the Alarms pull down menu. Select Overfill. (See Fig. 6-17)
Step 6. Click on the Select button to the right of the Alarms
pull down menu. (See Fig. 6-17) The Overfill
Alarm address appears in the Assignment Statement to the right of the equals sign which means it
is a Source. (See Fig. 6-18)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
70
FIG. 6-21 SLOW GATE SHUT (HI3.15) ADDED AS
THE SECOND SOURCE TO THE ASSIGNMENT
STATEMENT
Step 11. Click on the Map button to save the mapping. The
multiple source map appears in the Current Mappings listing. (See Fig. 6-22)
FIG. 6-18 OVERFILL ALARM (HI3.13) ENTERED IN
THE MAPPING ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT
Step 7. To add another Source to the Assignment Statement
and make it a Boolean “or” Statement, click on the
Or button below the Assignment Statement. A “+”
plus sign appears to the right of the Overfill
Address. (See Fig. 6-19)
FIG. 6-22 MULTIPLE SOURCE MAP
Step 12. You have now mapped multiple sources to a single
destination.
Simple Network Mapping
Mapping to a Network Output
FIG. 6-19 ADDING BOOLEAN “OR” TO THE
ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT
Step 8. Click on the Alarms pull down menu. (See Fig. 620)
Step 9. Click on Slow Gate Shut Alarm.
FIG. 6-20 ALARMS/SELECTING SLOW GATE SHUT
ALARM
Step 10. Click on the Select button to the right of the Alarms
pull down menu to add the “Slow Gate Shut Alarm”
to the Assignment Statement. (See Fig. 6-21)
If you want to send data to a PLC or other HI 3000 instrument you need to map the data to a network output. Here is
the process:
Step 1. From the Configuration - Mapping Setup #1 page,
click on the Network pull down menu and select
DeviceNet Int Out. (See Fig. 6-23)
FIG. 6-23 NETWORK/SELECTING DEVICENET INT
OUT
Step 2. Double click in the Word text box and type in the
number 2.
Step 3. Click on the Select button to set the Destination.
The DeviceNet Int Out address appears on the left
side of the Assignment Statement. (See Fig. 6-24)
71
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
FIG. 6-24 DEVICENET INT OUT (DIO2) SET AS
DESTINATION
Step 4. Click on the “Jump to Sources Page” button. The
Configuration - Mapping #2 page appears.
FIG. 6-27 LOCAL OUTPUT/SELECTING OUTPUT
RELAY #2
Step 2. Double click in the Relay# field and type the number of the relay you want. In our example we
selected Relay #2.
Step 3. Click on the Select button to select Output Relay #2
as the Destination for the left side of the Assignment Statement. (See Fig. 6-28)
FIG. 6-25 PROCESS DATA/SELECTING GROSS
WEIGHT
Step 5. Click on the Process Data pull down menu. (See
Fig. 6-25)
Step 6. Click on Gross Wt. (See Fig. 6-25)
Step 7. Click on the Select button to enter Gross Wt as the
source of the Assignment Statement.
Step 8. The Gross Wt address appears on the right side of
the Assignment Statement. (See Fig. 6-26)
FIG. 6-26 ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT MAPPING
GROSS WEIGHT (HF12) TO DEVICENET INT OUT
(DIO2)
Step 9. The Gross Weight is now available to the PLC via
the DeviceNet Scanner.
Mapping a Network Input to a Local Output
If you want a PLC to send instructions to an HI 3010 you
will have to map the local Output to a network input. Here is
the process:
NOTE:
Keep in mind that the network input on the HI
3010 will be the source for the PLC output. This
enables the PLC to send instructions to the network input on the HI 3010 and in turn to the HI
3010 output.
Step 1. From the Configuration - Mapping Setup #1 page,
click on the Local Outputs pull down menu and
select Output Relay. (See Fig. 6-27)
FIG. 6-28 OUTPUT RELAY #2 (HO0.1) SET AS
DESTINATION
Step 4. Click on the “Jump to Sources Page” button. The
Configuration - Mapping #2 page appears.
Step 5. Click on the Network pull down menu. (See Fig. 629)
FIG. 6-29 NETWORK/SELECTING DEVICENET
BOOLEAN IN
Step 6. The best choice for a source is a Boolean network
selection. In our example we selected “DeviceNet
Boolean In”. However you can select any of the
Network Sources. When you select a non-Boolean
source you are creating a mixed map. Go to the
Mixed Mapping Section below for more information.
Step 7. Double click in the Word text field and put in the
word number. Double click in the Bit text field and
enter the bit number. In our example we selected
Word 2, bit 1. (See Fig. 6-30)
FIG. 6-30 NETWORK/SELECTING NON-BOOLEAN
DEVICENET INT IN
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
72
Step 8. Click on “DeviceNet Boolean In” or “DeviceNet
Int In” to select it as the Source for the Assignment
Statement. (See Fig. 6-31)
Step 9. Click in the Word text box and type in the number
“2”.
Step 10. Click on the Select button to save the source.
FIG. 6-34 HIGHLIGHTING CURRENT MAPPING
FIG. 6-31 ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT MAPPING
DEVICENET BOOLEAN IN (DI2.1) TO OUTPUT
RELAY #2 (HO0.1)
FIG. 6-32 ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT MAPPING
DEVICENET INT IN (DIO2) TO OUTPUT RELAY #2
(HO0.1)
Step 11. Click on Map to save the mapping. (See Fig. 6-33)
FIG. 6-33 DEVICENET BOOLEAN IN MAPPED TO
OUTPUT RELAY #2
Step 12. Now whatever is sent to DeviceNet Boolean In
(DI2.1) or Devicenet Int In (DIO2) from the Network will be sent to Output Relay #2.
Unmapping
Step 1. Click and hold your mouse over the Current Mappings and highlight the mapping you want to delete
FIG. 6-35 COPY TO THE MAP TEXT FIELD
FIG. 6-36 REMOVING MAPPING
More Advanced Mapping
This section is for those who have some or a lot of experience Addressing I/O (mapping) or for those who want more
information as to how the mapping works locally and on the
network. We go into much more detail as to how the mapping works and include instructions for Boolean, Analog,
Mixed and Special Command mapping procedures.
Mapping is similar to Addressing I/O’s in a PLC except there
are no predefined mappings in the HI 3000 Series Instruments and you are not mapping the physical location of an I/
O module terminal to a bit location in the processor, you are
actually mapping values or states in memory to another
memory location. This difference is important to understand
and will be explained later in this chapter. In order to understand Mapping we first need to define some of the terms and
understand the structure of an Assignment Statement.
In short mapping is nothing more than assigning data from
an address (Source) to another address (Destination) to be
used by the controller in ways that meet your process
requirements. Since the HI 3010 does not have any predefined Addressed I/O you are free to Address I/O in any
fashion that meets your needs.
Glossary of Mapping Terms
Assignment Statement - The assignment statement is an
order to the computer to change the value stored in the variable (Memory Address) on the left-hand side of the assign-
73
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
ment operator (i.e. the = sign). For example: i = a + b, means
get the value stored in “a” and add it to the value stored in
“b” and store the sum value at memory address “i”. The left
hand side of the operator sign (=) is the address where you
want the values on the right hand side of the operator sign
(=) to be stored.
Rules for Hardy Control Link Mapping
Some rules for Hardy Link Mapping:
•
•
Destination - This is the destination memory address to
which data will be moved. Left Hand Side
Input Contacts (5 total) can only be a
Source.
Output Relays can be a Source and a Destination.
Local Input
I/O Interface - The section of the instrument that communicates with the “outside world”.
Input Contact - Inputs interface selector switches, push buttons, limit switches and other sensors to the HI 3010. Each
input has an address associated with it which describes the
physical location that the input device is connected to.
Input Image Table - A data table containing addressed
memory where the states of the input devices and parameter
values are stored. The state of each input device is transferred to the input image table from the input point during
the I/O scan.
Local Mapping - This is mapping within an HI 3010 Filler/
Dispenser module, primarily mapping internal memory locations of parameter values or device states to locations in the
local Input Image Table or Output Image Table.
Network Mapping - This is mapping between the master
and slave devices in the case of a DeviceNet, ControlNet,
RIO or Profibus network. Hardy Control Link network mapping is mapping between nodes on the network.
NOTE:
It is important to understand that you cannot perform mapping functions on one HI 3000 Series
Instrument from another HI 3000 Series instrument. You must map the memory locations in
each instrument separately. More will said about
this later.
Node Number - This is the physical address of a device in a
network.
Output Relay - Outputs interface indicators, motor starters,
solenoids, and other actuators from the HI 3010. Each output
has an address associated with it. The address describes the
physical location that the output device is connected to.
Output Image Table - The data table containing addressed
memory where the desired state of the output devices and
parameter values are stored. The desired state or parameter
value of each output is transferred from the output image file
to the output point during the I/O scan.
Source - This is the memory address of the data you want to
move to the destination. Right Hand Side
Inputs interface with selector switches, push buttons, limit
switches and other sensors connected to the HI 3010. When
the firmware is initiated it assigns the physical input contact
to a memory address (Remember Inputs can only be a
Source when mapping). (See Source definition in the Glossary of Mapping Terms)
Data Table
Input
0
1
Input Device
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
Output Image
Input Image
2
3
4
5
3
4
Address
1/3
FIG. 6-37 INPUT FUNCTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
Each input has an address associated with
it.
The address describes the physical location that the input device is connected to.
The address also describes the Input Image
Table location where the STATE of the
input device is stored.
The state of each input is transferred to the
Input Image File from the input point during the I/O scan every 1/55th of a second.
(See Fig. 6-37)
When you are mapping an Input to some
other Destination you are assigning the
value in the Input Image Table (for that
Input) to an Address in the Output Image
Table.
For example: OK TO FILL = Contact
closure input #5 means assign the state
(Open (0) or Closed (1)) of Contact #5,
contained in the Contact Closure input #5
memory address, in the Input Image Table
and move it to the OK TO FILL address in
the Output Image Table. (See Fig. #6-38)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Local Output
Outputs interface with indicators, motor starters, solenoids,
and other actuators connected to the HI 3010. Remember
Outputs can be a Destination and a Source. (See Destination
definition in the Glossary of Mapping Terms)
Data Table
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Output
0
0
Output Image
1
Input Image
2
0
1
3
4
2
5
Output Device
3
Address
0/3
74
The equals (=) sign assigns the data on the right side of the
Assignment Statement to the Memory Address on the left
side of the Assignment Statement.
This is exactly what you are doing when you map a source to
a destination.
The things that can be mapped are organized into Input
Image Tables and Output Image Tables, which are arrays of
variables (i.e. memory locations of a certain size based on
the type assigned to the variable) with addresses where data
is stored.
A table is called an “output” image table if the items in the
table are permitted to be on the left hand side of an Assignment Statement. The Output variables are also further identified by the first two letters of the variable:
FIG. 6-38 OUTPUT FUNCTION
•
•
•
•
•
Each output has an address associated with
it.
This address describes the physical location that the output device is connected to.
This address also describes the data table
location where the desired state of the output device is stored.
The desired state of each output is transferred from the output image table to the
output point during the I/O Scan every 1/
55th of a second. (See Fig. 6-38)
For Example: Relay out #3 = FAST FILL
means assign the desired state (Open (0) or
Closed (1)) located at the Fast Fill Address
in the input image table and move it to the
Relay out #3 address in the Output Image
Table. (See Fig. 6-38)
Volatile and Non-Volatile Memory
It is important to understand that the data stored in the Output and Input Image Tables is stored in volatile memory.
This means, when you power off you lose the data. The
Addressing I/O (Mapping) is saved in non-volatile memory
and is not lost when you power off.
A Definition of Mapping
Mapping (Addressing I/O) is the same as using an Assignment Statement. The Destination is located on the left hand
side of the equals (=) sign and is a memory address (variable). The Source is the data located on the right hand side of
the equals (=) sign at a memory address. So when you refer
to the right hand side of the Assignment Statement you are
referring to the data only and not the address even though the
address is listed.
•
Memory Address (Variable) = Data (Values, states)
•
•
•
•
NOTE:
HO - Hardy Output Image Table
DO - DeviceNet Output Image Table
RO - RIO Output Image Table
CO - ControlNet Output Image Table or
Profibus Output Image Table.
You won’t use ControlNet and Profibus at the
same time so they can both use the same tables.
If the items in the table are only permitted on the right hand
side of an Assignment Statement, we call it an “input” image
table:
•
•
•
•
HI - Hardy Input Image Table
DI - DeviceNet Input Image Table
RI - RIO Input Image Table
CI - ControlNet Input Image Table or Profibus Output Image Table.
For example, the digital inputs on the Filler/Dispenser are
found in an input image table, as are the items in the DeviceNet input image table.
The HI 3010 scans through the I/O image tables 55 times a
second and reads any values that are contained in the tables.
If there is nothing stored in the tables the controller does
nothing with it. If there are state values or other values stored
in the tables, the firmware processes the data and outputs it
to an output device or the screen.
Local Mapping Example
Local Mapping Output
You hardwired a Valve Actuator to Output Relay #1. When
the Filling process gets an OK to Fill the Filler changes the
Fast Fill value (which is stored in the Input Image Table)
from 0 to 1 which means, close the output relay to begin a
fast fill. You need to map the Fast Fill to Output Relay #1.
75
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
The Destination is Output Relay #1 a State value that is
located in the Output Image Table at Address HO0.0.
WHICH NODE IT IS COMMUNICATING WITH.
The source is the Fast Fill value that is stored in the Fast Fill
memory address (HI2.1) in the Input Image Table. Do not
confuse the value with the address.
The Network scanner, scans each node’s Output Image Table
to read the values that are located there. If there are values in
the nodes’ Output Image Table it reads the values to the
PLC’s Input Image Table which makes the data available to
the PLC for processing.
So now you have a Destination Address to which you can
assign the Source value.
My Assignment Statement is:
HO0.0 = HI2.1
Output Relay = Fast Fill
HI 3010
To Actuator
Output Ima ge
Table
Output
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
Input
0
1
2
Output Relay #1
Desired State (1)
Input Image
Table
Fast Fill (HI2.1)
value 1
3
4
HO0.0 = HI2.1
Local Mapping - HI 3010
FIG. 6-39 MAPPING THE FAST FILL TO OUTPUT
RELAY #1
As the instrument scans the Input Image Table it sees the
new state value (close = 1) for the Fast Fill which was set by
the instrument’s firmware. It takes the new state value (1)
and sends it to the Output Relay #1 address on the Output
Image Table and sets the desired state for the relay to 1
which simultaneously closes the relay that opens the actuator
for a valve to begin a Fast Fill.
Network Input
PLC’s also have Input Image Tables and Output Image
Tables. The HI 3010 is a node in a total network and you
assign the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser a node address so the
Network scanner can identify the instrument.
WARNING: YOU CANNOT ASSIGN THE SAME ADDRESS
TO TWO DIFFERENT NODES. THE PLC CANNOT DETERMINE
THIS CAN
RESULT IN PROPERTY DAMAGE OR PERSONAL INJURY.
Here again you can assign the data in the node’s output
image table to an address in the PLC input image Table. So if
you want the net weight to be displayed in the PLC’s output
(screen) you have already assigned the Net Weight value
located in the Input Image Table to the Output Image Table.
The PLC Scanner reads the Net Weight value in the nodes’s
Output Image Table and moves the value to a word location
in the Input Image Table on the PLC. The Input Image Table
Net Weight value is then output let’s say to the PLC screen.
Network Output
When the Network Scanner writes values to the nodes it does
this by taking the data located in the PLC Output Image
Table and writes the values to another nodes’ Input Image
Table. Once the value is in the node’s Input Image Table it
becomes a source and can be mapped to any destination in
the HI 3010. (See Fig. 6-40)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
HI 3010/DeviceNet
Node #1
Output
76
PLC
Input Image
Table
Input Image
Table
Boolean Word 11
0
1
2
Output Image
Table
Output Image
Table
3
OK To Fill
Mapping to OK to Fill on HI 3010
FIG. 6-40 DEVICENET OUTPUT
HI 3010/DeviceNet
Node #1
Input Image
Table
TOL Alarm
Output
0
1
2
Output Image
Table
3
Boolean Word 3
Mapping to the DeviceNet Light Bar
FIG. 6-41 DEVICENET OUTPUT
Hardy Control Link Network Mapping
If an HI 3010 Node #1 does not have any Output Relays
available, you can select another node’s Output Relay. HI
3010, Node #2 has an output relay available. This requires
that you first map Node #1 and Node #2 separately so that
the input contact in Node #1 can be mapped directly to the
Output Relay in Node #2. (See Fig. 6-42)
Step 2. You need to set up communication between Node
#1 and Node #2. You can do this by going to the HI
3010 Web Page, select Configuration, select Hardy
Control-Link. For complete instructions to setup
communications between instruments go to the HI
3000 Installation and Operation manual, Hardy
Control-Link Ethernet Network, Setting Node
Addresses for HI 3000 Series Instruments from the
Browser.
Step 3. At node #2 you need to map the Output Relay #3
state value, in the Output Image Table to the Hardy
Boolean In address in the Input Image Table. (See
Fig. 6-42 Green Arrows)
Step 4. At node #1 you need map Input Contact #1 in the
Input Image Table to Hardy Boolean Out in the
Output Image Table. (See Fig. 6-42 Red Arrows)
Step 5. Now that you have set up the local mapping for
Node #1 and Node #2 and Node #1 is communicating with Node #2 you can map the Input Contact at
Node #1 directly to the Output Relay at Node #2.
(See Fig. 6-42 Black Arrow)
77
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
HI 3010
Node #1
HI 3010
Input Image
Table
Input Contact #1
Input
Input Image
Table
Hardy Boolean In
Node #2
Output
0
From Sensor
0
1
1
2
2
3
Output Image
Table
Output Image
Table
4
Hardy Boolean Out
Output Relay #3
Too Actuator
3
Mapping an Input to an Output Relay on Another HI 3010
FIG. 6-42 HARDY CONTROL LINK NETWORK MAPPING
Boolean Mapping
A Boolean variable is a variable that can have the value 0
(FALSE) or 1 (TRUE). In the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser there
are 3 boolean operations supported:
•
•
•
AND - The symbol for “AND” in a Boolean Assignment Statement is “*”.
OR - The symbol for “OR” in a Boolean
Assignment Statement is “+”.
NOT - the symbol for “NOT” in a Boolean
Assignment Statement is “~”.
The Boolean image tables are arrays of short (2 byte) integers. An individual Boolean variable in the image table is
located by its word offset and its bit offset. Boolean image
tables are given 2 letter names as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
•
DI
DO
table.
HI
HO
RI
RO
is the DeviceNet input image table.
is the DeviceNet output image
is the Hardy input image table.
is the Hardy output image table.
is RIO input image table.
is RIO output image table.
The RIO input and output images tables are mapped to physical external devices using RSLogix. DeviceNet and ControlNet input and output image tables are mapped to physical
external devices using Rockwell Software’s RS NetWorx.
The Hardy input and output image tables have pre-defined
meanings for certain bits within the tables.
NOTE:
Make sure you use RS NetWorx for DeviceNet
and RS NetWorx for ControlNet. They are two
different applications.
A Boolean variable is addressed with the syntax below:
[tablename][word offset].[bit offset]
Example:
DI0.3 is bit #3 in the DeviceNet input table, word #0.
Analog Mapping
An analog variable is one that can have many different values. The HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser supports float, 16 bit integer, and 32 bit integer analog variable types.
There are three (3) analog operations supported. The symbols are the same as the Boolean operations, but with different meanings.
•
•
•
Multiply - The symbol for “Multiply” is
“*”.
Add - The symbol for “Add” is “+”.
Negate - the symbol for “Negate” is “~”.
Analog tables are given 3 letter names as follows:
DFI, DFO, DSI, DSO, DII, DIO all refer to DeviceNet
tables, where the item is a float, a short integer, or a 32 bit
integer depending on the second letter in the table name. HFI
is a table of Hardy defined floating point numbers.
An analog variable is addressed with the syntax below:
[tablename][word offset]
The offset is an offset in words in the case of the DeviceNet
tables. The offsets in Hardy tables have various predefined
meanings.
•
•
HFI0 - is Gross Weight
HFI1 - is Net Weight
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
. . . . other offsets to be determined.
When an analog Assignment Statement is evaluated, all
value types get converted to float. The final result is then
converted to the type of the LHS (Left Hand Side).
Mixed Mapping
It is permissible to have analog variables appear in Boolean
Assignment Statements and to have Boolean variables in
analog Assignment Statements. (We call a mixed Assignment Statement “Boolean” if its LHS (Left Hand Side of the
= sign) is a Boolean term, and “Analog” if its LHS is an analog term) The interpretation is as follows:
A Boolean variable in an analog Assignment Statement is
converted to 1.0 or 0.0.
An Analog variable in a Boolean Assignment Statement is
TRUE if it is greater than zero (0) and FALSE if it is less
than or equal to zero (0).
For Example:
You want to change the state (actuate) of a relay when the
Net Weight exceeds a fixed amount (value).
78
Data returned by the HI 3010: 8 bytes, echoing the WRITEFLOAT command.
WRITESTRING, command number0x1002
The WRITESTRING command can be used to set the value
of any parameter.
Command data:
2 bytes: PARAMETER NUMBER: the number (PARAMID)
of the parameter to write.
Variable number of bytes: a zero terminated ASCII string,
giving the value to set the parameter to.
Data returned by the HI 3010: 8 bytes, echoing the first 8
bytes of the WRITESTRING command.
READINTEGER 0x2000
READFLOAT 0x2001
These commands are used to read the value of integer or
float parameters.
Command data:
2 bytes: PARAMETER NUMBER: the number (PARAMID)
of the parameter to read.
Data returned by the HI 3010: 8 bytes. The first 4 bytes echo
the command, and the next 4 contain the value of the parameter.
Special (Command) Mapping)
Command Interface consists of:
•
•
•
•
16 bit words
Word 0
Command #
Word 1
Parameter ID
Words 2&3 Data.
Setting up the command interface in mapping:
Use an Assignment Statement of the form
CMD0 = (in_table)*(out_table)
In_table is an input image table, defining where the command is written.
Out_table defines where the reply data is written.
Example:
The commands defined are the following:
CMD0 = DI0.0*DO0.0
WRITEINTEGER, command number 0x1000
The WRITEINTEGER command is used to set the value of
integer valued parameters.
Command data:
2 bytes: PARAMETER NUMBER: the number (PARAMID)
of the parameter to write.
4 bytes: PARAMETER VALUE: what to set the parameter
to.
This Assignment Statement says the command will be written to the DeviceNet input image table, at word offset 0, and
the reply data is written to the DeviceNet output image table,
at word offset zero.
It is legal to omit the Out_table.
Example:
Data returned by the HI 3010: 8 bytes, echoing the
WRITEINTEGER command.
WRITEFLOAT, command number 0x1001
The WRITEFLOAT command is used to set the value of
float valued parameters.
Command data:
2 bytes: PARAMETER NUMBER: the number (PARAMID)
of the parameter to write.
4 bytes: PARAMETER VALUE: what to set the parameter
to.
CMD0=DI3.0
This assignment statement says that the command will be
written to the DeviceNet input image table, at word offset 3,
but no reply data will be written.
79
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
Command Interface
Parameter Numbers, Code Explanations and Valid
Ranges
CAUTION: THESE VALUES AND EXPLANATIONS CAN
CHANGE. ALWAYS CHECK ON THE HARDY WEB SITE FOR
THE NEWEST COMMAND INTERFACE LIST BEFORE USING
THE COMMAND INTERFACE.
NOTE:
Data is handled based on the method used writing data to the unit. If data is written using the
Command Interface (See Below) the data is interpreted based on the displayed units. However, if
data is directly mapped into the unit, the unit
assumes lbs (pounds) and converts the entered
data to the displayed units.
Parameter
Number
(Hexadecimal)
Code Explanation
Valid Range
Parameter
Number
(Hexadecimal)
Code Explanation
Valid Range
0010
Infrared Enable
1 = ON, 0 = OFF
0011
Active Target Weight
.000001-999999
0012
Active Num Cycles
0 = cont.,
or 1-999999
0013
OK to Fill Input
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0014
Discharge
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0015
Auto Discharge
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0016
OK to Discharge
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0017
Aux Device Time
0-999
0018
Discharge Gate
Proof
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0019
Discharge Gate
Timer (seconds)
0-99
001A
Use Auto-Zero
1 = YES, 0 = NO
001B
Auto-Zero Tolerance Time
.01-9.99
0001
Operator ID
DFD
0002
Instrument ID
Max. 19 characters
001C
Tare Limit
999999.0000
0003
OK to Fill Timer
0-999
0022
Refill
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0004
WAVERSAVER®
0 = None
5 = .25 Hz
4 = .50 Hz
3 = 1.0 Hz
2 = 3.50 Hz
1 = 7.50 Hz
0023
Initial Refill
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0024
OK to Discharge
Timer (seconds)
0-999
002A
Baud Rate
0 = 300
1 = 1200
2 = 2400
3 = 4800
4 = 9600
5 = 19200
002B
Parity
0 = None
1 = Odd
2 = Even
002C
Data Bits
0 = 7 bits
1 = 8 bits
0005
Number of Averages
1-250
0006
Zero Tolerance
0.000001-999999
0007
Units of Measure
0 = lb, 1 = Kg, 2 =
g 3 = oz
0008
Decimal Point
0-5
0009
Total Decimal Point
0-5
000A
Grad Size
0=1, 1=2, 2=5,
3=10, 4=20, 5=50,
6=100, 7=200,
8=500, 9=1000
0038
Proof Switch
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0039
Gate Timer
(seconds)
0-99
000B
Print Total
1 = YES, 0 = NO
003B
Refill Weight
.000001-999999
000C
Auto Print
1 = YES, 0 = NO
003C
Refill Duration Timer
0-999
000D
Motion Tolerance
.01-999999
003D
Auto-Tare time
5.0000
000E
Auto-Zero Tolerance
.000001-999999
0200
Reference Weight
000F
Capacity
.000001-999999
0.000001-999999
(Read Only)
TABLE 6-2: PARAMETER NUMBER, CODE
EXPLANATION AND VALID RANGES
TABLE 6-2: PARAMETER NUMBER, CODE
EXPLANATION AND VALID RANGES
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Parameter
Number
(Hexadecimal)
Suffix
Code Explanation
Code Explanation
Valid Range
Valid Range
0201
Span Weight
0.000001-999999
(Read Only)
0204
Cal Type
0 = C2
1 = Traditional
Hard Calibration
(Read Only)
pp02
Total
.0000001-999999
pp03
Cycles
0-9999
(Current Count
Read Only)
pp04
Fills
0-9999
(Fill Cycles Menu)
pp05
Speed
0 = Single
1 = Dual
pp06
Target Weight
0.000001-999999
0280
Serial Number
14 (Read Only)
0281
Model Number
HI 3010
(Read Only)
pp07
Preact
0.0000001-999999
0282
Program Part Number
0650-0xxx-01
(Read Only)
pp08
Auto Preact
1 = YES
0 = NO
0283
Firmware Revision
1.X.XX
(Read Only)
pp09
Target Min/Max
0 = Weight
1 = Percentage
02F0
NO Assignment
Statements Defined
HFO0=+HF12,
DFO0=+HF13,
HO0.0=+HI2.1
(Read Only)
pp0A
Max. Weight
0.000000-999999
pp0B
Min. Weight
0.000000-999999
pp0C
Max.%
0.00000-99.9
pp0D
Min.%
0.00000-99.9
pp0E
Jog ON time
0.00000-99.9
pp0F
Jog Count
0-9
pp10
Jog Off Time
0.1-99.9
pp11
Fill time
0-999
pp12
Wait Timer
0.00000-999.9
pp13
Mode
0 = Sequential
1 = Simultaneous
pp14
Fast Target Weight
0.000001999999.00
pp15
Auto Fast
1 = YES
0 = NO
pp16
Fast Gate Time
0-99
pp17
Fast Limit Switch
1 = YES
0 = NO
pp18
Slow Limit Switch
1 = YES
0 = NO
pp19
Slow Gate Time
0-99
TABLE 6-2: PARAMETER NUMBER, CODE
EXPLANATION AND VALID RANGES
Ingredients 1-12 are duplicates and are addressed and formatted as follows:
•
ppss:
Where pp is the prefix for the ingredient
number. (HEX)
Where ss is the suffix ingredient parameter. (HEX)
Ingredient Number 1
Ingredient Number 2
Ingredient Number 3
Ingredient Number 4
Ingredient Number 5
Ingredient Number 6
Ingredient Number 7
Ingredient Number 8
Ingredient Number 9
Ingredient Number 10
Ingredient Number 11
Ingredient Number 12
80
Prefix:
03ss
07ss
0Bss
0Fss
03ss
17ss
1Bss
1Fss
23ss
27ss
2Bss
2Fss
TABLE 6-3: INGREDIENTS 1-12
Mapping From the Front Panel
Suffix
pp01
Code Explanation
Ingredient Name
Valid Range
ONE (19 Characters)
TABLE 6-3: INGREDIENTS 1-12
Mapping assigns controllable Inputs and Outputs to any
point on a Local Controller. Mapping can be done from the
Front Panel or the Browser.
81
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
A Control Output can be mapped (Assigned) to a Local
Relay.
Step 6. Press the Enter button. The Item Selection Menu
appears with a list of sources. (See Fig. 6-46)
For example:
ITEMSELECTION
For a 1 to 1 Configuration - If “OK to Fill” is the destination,
the source can be “Input 1”. When the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser receives an “OK to Fill” signal, Input 1 is activated
which might stop a motor from starting, a gate from opening
etc. You need to select “OK to Fill” as the Destination and
Input 1 as the source.
Step 1. Press the Setup/3/DEF button once. The Configuration Menu appears with the cursor in front of
“ADJUST INGREDIENT” (Default).
Step 2. Press the down or up arrow buttons to move the
cursor in front of I/O Mapping. (See Fig. 6-43)
> Not Mapped
Input 1
Input 2
FIG. 6-46 ITEM SELECTION MENU/NOT MAPPED
SELECTED
Step 7. Press the up or down arrow button to until the cursor is in front of Input 1. (See Fig. 47)
ITEMSELECTION
Not Mapped
> Input 1
Input 2
FIG. 6-43 CONFIGURATION MENU/I/O MAPPING
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The Basic I/O Mapping
Menu appears. (See Fig. 6-44) The List you see is a
list of Destinations. We need to map the Destination
(OK to Fill) to the Source (Input 1)
Step 4. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of OK to Fill. (See Fig. 6-44)
FIG. 6-47 ITEM SELECTION MENU/INPUT 1
SELECTED
Step 8. Press the Enter button to map Input 1 to “OK to
Fill”.
Step 9. Press the Exit button to return to the OK to Fill
Menu. (See Fig. 6-48) Notice that Input 1 appears
in place of Not Mapped.
“OK t o Fil l ”
> ITEM
Input 1- >
FIG. 6-48 OK TO FILL MENU/INPUT 1 MAPPED
FIG. 6-44 BASIC I/O MAPPING/OK TO FILL
SELECTION
Step 5. “OK to Fill” Menu appears. (See Fig. 45)
“OK t o Fil l ”
> ITEM
Not Mapped - >
FIG. 6-49 OK TO FILL/SOURCE MAPPED
Step 10. Press Exit to get back to the Basic I/O Mapping
Menu. Notice that an asterisk (*) has been added to
FIG. 6-45 OK TO FILL MENU/ITEM NOT MAPPED
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
the right arrow indicating that OK to Fill is mapped
to something. (See Fig. 6-50)
Step 11. To Map other items repeat steps 1-8 for those items
you want to map.
82
Step 6. Press the Exit button to return to the OK to Fill
Menu. (See Fig. 6-53)
“OK t o Fil l ”
> ITEM
Not Mapped - >
FIG. 6-53 OK TO FILL MENU/ITEM UNMAPPED
FIG. 6-50 OK TO FILL MAP INDICATION
Step 12. To check what Items are mapped to which Input or
what Outputs are mapped to which Item, just go to
the Basic I/O Mapping Menu, select the Destination
you want to see and press Enter. The mapped data is
readily available.
Unmapping Procedures for Front Panel
Step 1. To Unmap Items go to the Basic I/O Mapping
Menu.
Step 2. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of the Item you want to unmap. In our
example we used “OK to Fill”.
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The “OK to Fill” Menu
appears. (See Fig. 6-51)
“OK t o Fil l ”
> ITEM
Input 1- >
FIG. 6-51 OK TO FILL MENU/INPUT 1 MAPPED
Step 4. Press the Enter button. The Item Selection Menu
appears with the cursor in front of Not Mapped
(Default). (See Fig. 52)
FIG. 6-52 ITEM SELECTION/SELECTING NOT
MAPPED
Step 5. Press the enter button to set the entry.
Step 7. Press on the Exit button to return to the Basic I/O
Mapping Menu. (See Fig. 6-54) Notice that the
asterisk no longer appears. This tells you that the
item is unmapped.
BASIC I/ O MAPPING
St op
> OK t o Fil l
Cl ear Al ar m
->
->
->
FIG. 6-54 BASIC I/O MAPPING/OK TO FILL
UNMAPPED
Step 8. If you want to unmap more items just repeat steps
1-7.
83
CHAPTER 6
Mapping
Mapping a Hardy Control-Link Network to
a ControlNet/DeviceNet/Profibus Network
FIG. 6-55 HARDY CONTROL-LINK NETWORK CONNECTED TO A CONTROLNET/DEVICENET/PROFIBUS
NETWORK
The Hardy HI 3000 Series of controllers are designed to save
you money. To connect a Hardy Control-Link Network to a
ControlNet/DeviceNet/Profibus Network simply purchase
one of the Hardy HI 3000 Series Network Interface Option
Cards and install it in the instrument that you want to directly
connect to the other network. You can map to this instrument
from all the other instruments on the Hardy Control-Link
Network, rather than buy a separate network card for each
instrument. (See Fig. 6-55)
Step 1. Determine into which Instrument you want to
install the Network option card.
Step 2. Install the network card. See the HI 3000 Installation and Operation manual, Cabling and Installation
Section.
Step 3. Connect the network cables from the designated HI
3000 Series Instrument and begin mapping to that
instrument from either the Hardy Control-Link Network or the ControlNet/DeviceNet/Profibus Network.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
84
85
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
CHAPTER 7: TROUBLESHOOTING
About Chapter 7
•
Chapter 7 consists of all the procedures for troubleshooting
the electrical, mechanical and firmware elements of the HI
3010 Filler/Dispenser in the event of a malfunction. Included
in Chapter 7 is a comprehensive flow chart to provide a road
map for troubleshooting an entire Filler/Dispenser system,
including load cells and cabling.
•
For help with networking, card options, security, and Email,
see the HI 3000 Series Operation and Installation Manual.
•
Disassembly and Reassembly Notes and
Cautions
•
Always disconnect the power cord before
disassembling.
WARNING: FAILURE TO DISCONNECT THE POWER CORD
BEFORE DISASSEMBLING MAY CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY
AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that any disassembly is done in
a clean, well ventilated, properly controlled static environment.
Always make sure that the assemblies and
sub-assemblies are well supported and
insulated when doing any repairs on the
Filler/Dispenser.
Place small fasteners, connectors and electrical parts in closed containers so as not to
lose parts during reassembly.
Read all the disassembly instructions
before any disassembly begins. Be sure
that you are familiar with the procedures.
If any of the instructions for disassembly
are unclear, contact Hardy Instruments,
Technical Support Department for additional information and assistance.
Do not disconnect any electrical plug, connector or terminal unless an identification
tag is present or one is attached. Always
note where the connector or plug was
attached to the electrical component or
wiring harness.
Always install complete hardware groups
(Screws, Washers, Lock Washers, Spacers,
Etc.) back to the original point of removal.
Always replace broken or damaged modules or hardware immediately!
Always check to be sure that no loose
parts are sitting on printed circuit boards
or electrical connectors or wires when disassembling or reassembling.
Always protect printed circuit boards from
electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always use
approved ESD wrist straps and anti-static
pads.
Always perform a final inspection after
completing any reassembly to be sure that
all fasteners are tight, all connectors are
secure and there are no loose parts on any
of the printed circuit boards in the Filler/
Dispenser.
Always follow proper safety procedures
when working on or around the Filler/Dispenser.
Error Messages
!A/D Failure Error! - Internal Electronics Error, Retry.
!A/D Convert Error! - Load Cells input out of range.
!Motion Error! - Check Settings and Retry
!Trad Cal Error! - Error occurred during calibration,
re-calibrate.
!C2 Cal Error! - Error occurred during calibration,
re-calibrate.
!Too Lo Error! - Verify that the load cell signal level is
0-15 mV.
!Too Hi Error! - Verify that the load cell signal level is
0-15 mV.
!No C2 Sensor! - Instrument did not detect a C2 Load Sensor
!CAL Failed! - Not enough counts between Zero and Span.
List of Alarms
Not OK to FILL Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If it is NOT OK TO FILL, an alarm
appears in the display. (See Fig.7-1)
FIG. 7-1 NOT OK TO FILL
1.
2.
The Operator needs to determine why
it is NOT OK to FILL by checking for
problems with the electrical and /or
mechanical systems.
Once the problem has been fixed,
push the Clear button to clear the
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Alarm. The Filler/Dispenser begins
filling.
86
Fast Gate Did Not Open Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - -
NOTE:
The OK to Fill Timer has a preset time to determine if it is OK to Fill. If the OK to Fill times out,
it means that the preset time is too short for the
process and the NOT OK to FILL Alarm appears
with no real alarm conditions. You may need to
reset the timer if it appears that no electrical or
mechanical reason for the alarm is determined.
The OK to FILL timer may be set incorrectly for
your process. See the HI 3010 Service Manual for
Instructions on setting the OK to FILL Timer.
•
If the Fast Fill Gate is not open at the time
you want to fill, the FAST GATE DID
NOT OPEN alarm appears on the display.
(See Fig. 7-4)
Lost OK to Fill Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - FIG. 7-4 FAST FILL GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM
During the filling process, conditions may develop that
cause the Filler/Dispenser to lose the OK to FILL during
Fast Fill or Slow Fill. When this occurs an alarm appears that
says LOST OK TO FILL. (See Figs. 7-2 & 7-3)
1.
2.
Determine why the Fast Fill Gate did
not open and correct the problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The RESUME FILLING FAST
display appears. (See Fig. 7-5)
FIG. 7-2 LOST OK TO FILL ALARM/FAST FILL
FIG. 7-5 RESUME FILLING FAST DISPLAY
3.
Press the Start button to resume fast
fill.
Fast Gate Did Not Close Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - FIG. 7-3 LOST OK TO FILL ALARM/SLOW FILL
1.
2.
The Operator needs to determine why
the system LOST OK to FILL by
checking for problems with the electrical and /or mechanical systems.
Once the problem has been fixed,
push the Clear button to clear the
Alarm. Press the Start button, the
Filler/Dispenser resumes filling from
where it stopped. Press Stop to Halt.
•
If the Fast Fill Gate does not close at the
end of a fill, the FAST GATE DID NOT
CLOSE alarm appears on the display. (See
Fig. 7-6)
FIG. 7-6 FAST GATE DID NOT CLOSE
87
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
1.
2.
Determine why the Fast Fill Gate did
not close and correct the problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The RESUME FILLING FAST
display appears. (See Fig. 7-7)
FIG. 7-9 RESUME FILLING SLOW
3.
FIG. 7-7 RESUME FILLING FAST DISPLAY
3.
4.
Press the Start button to resume fast
fill.
If the target weight is NOT within the
target window and you do not have
the JOG function turned ON, the fill is
not accepted and an UNDER FILL! or
OVER FILL alarm appears depending
on the alarm condition.
Press the Start button to resume slow
filling.
Slow Gate Did Not Close Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Slow Fill Gate does NOT close, the
SLOW GATE DID NOT CLOSE alarm
appears on the display. (See Fig. 7-10)
Slow Gate Did Not Open Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Slow Fill Gate is not open at the time
you want to slow fill, the SLOW GATE
DID NOT OPEN alarm appears on the display. (See Fig. 7-8)
FIG. 7-10 SLOW GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM
1.
2.
Determine why the slow Fill Gate did
not close and correct the problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The Wait Timer display
appears. (See Fig. 7-11
FIG. 7-8 SLOW GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM
1.
2.
Determine why the Slow Fill Gate did
not open and correct the problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The “RESUME FILLING
SLOW” display appears. (See Fig. 79)
FIG. 7-11 WAIT TIMER DISPLAY
3.
If the fill is within the target window
and you do not have the Discharge
Function turned ON (See Discharge
Function above), the instrument
returns to the Waiting On Display,
repeats the motion check, autozeros,
autotares and/or checks the OK to Fill
processes and begins fill cycle number 2, then 3, 4 and so on. (See Fig. 711)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
4.
3.
If the fill is within the target window
and it is the last fill cycle of a fill
sequence, the instrument goes to
Standby and the Standby Display
appears. (See Fig. 7-12)
88
The instrument returns to the Waiting
On Display, repeats the motion check,
autozeros, autotares and/or checks the
OK to Fill processes and begins fill
cycle number 2.
Other Wait Displays that can appear are as follows:
•
•
•
Waiting for Motion to settle.
Waiting for Log Off to expire.
Waiting for fill/dispense to continue.
FIG. 7-15 ACCEPT FILL DISPLAY
•
UNDERFILL ALARM, press the Clear
button to clear the alarm, the Accept the
Fill display appears. At this time you can:
1. Accept the fill by pressing the START
button.
2. Physically add some of the material
until it meets the target window
requirements and then press the
START button.
3. The instrument returns to the Waiting
On Display, repeats the motion check,
autozeros, autotares and/or checks the
OK to Fill processes and begins fill
cycle number 2.
•
If the gain in weight is NOT within the target window and the JOG function is turned
ON the Filler/Dispenser automatically
does the following:
FIG. 7-12 WAIT DISPLAY
Underfill /Overfill Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - -
FIG. 7-13 UNDERFILL ALARM
1.
2.
FIG. 7-14 OVERFILL ALARM
•
OVERFILL ALARM, press the Clear button to clear the alarm. The Accept the Fill
display appears.(See Fig. 7-15) At this
time you can:
1.
2.
Accept the fill by pressing the START
button.
Physically remove some of the material until it meets the target window
requirements and then press the
START button.
3.
If the out of target window is an
OVERFILL the OVER FILL alarm
appears. Clear the alarm using the
same procedures for the OVERFILL
Alarm in the previous section.
If the out of target window is an
UNDER FILL, the Jog ON display
appears.
If Jog is off you will get a wait display
until the amount is satisfied.
89
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
Dispense Alarms
Over Refill Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - -
FIG. 7-18 DISPENSE STANDBY DISPLAY
Not OK to Dispense Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - FIG. 7-16 OVER REFILL ALARM
•
•
If the Refill exceeds the Refill High set
point or exceeds the capacity of the vessel
the OVER REFILL ALARM appears.
(See Fig. 7-16)
1. Correct the Over Refill condition.
2. Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The Dispense Standby display
appears. (See Fig. 7-17)
If it is NOT OK TO DISPENSE, an alarm
appears in the display. (See Fig. 7-19)
Refill Timeout Alarm
FIG. 7-19 NOT OK TO DISPENSE
1. The Operator needs to determine why
it is NOT OK TO DISPENSE by
checking for problems with the electrical and /or mechanical systems.
2. Once the problem has been fixed,
push the Clear button to clear the
Alarm. The Filler/Dispenser begins
dispensing.
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - -
NOTE:
FIG. 7-17 REFILL TIME-OUT ALARM
•
If the time taken to Refill exceeds the
Refill Time-out parameter which is set
during configuration, the Refill Time-out
Alarm appears. For setup information
check the HI 3010 Service Manual.
1. Check to see why the refill took too
long. If there is an obstruction, or
excessive material bridging, etc. correct the problem.
2. If the Refill Time-out was set incorrectly. Use your HI 3010 Service
Manual and reset the Refill Time-out
parameter.
3. Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The Dispense Standby display
appears. (See Fig.7-18)
The OK to DISPENSE Timer has a preset time to
determine if it is OK to Dispense. If the OK to
Dispense times out, it means that the preset time
is too short for the process and the NOT OK to
DISPENSE Alarm appears with no real alarm
condition. You may need to reset the timer if it
appears that no electrical or mechanical reason
for the alarm is determined. The OK to DISPENSE timer may be set incorrectly for your process. See the HI 3010 Service Manual for
Instructions on setting the OK to DISPENSE
Timer
Lost OK to Dispense Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
During the dispensing process, conditions
may develop that cause the Filler/Dispenser to lose the OK to DISPENSE during Fast Dispense or Slow Dispense.
When this occurs an alarm appears that
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
2.
says LOST OK TO DISPENSE. (See Figs.
7-20 & 7-21)
FIG. 7-20 LOST OK TO DISPENSE ALARM/FAST
DISPENSE
Fast Gate Did Not Open Alarm
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The RESUME DISPENSING? display appears. (See Fig. 7-23)
FIG. 7-23 RESUME DISPENSING FAST DISPLAY
•
FIG. 7-21 LOST OK TO DISPENSE ALARM/SLOW
DISPENSE
1. The Operator needs to determine why
the system LOST OK to DISPENSE
by checking for problems with the
electrical and /or mechanical systems.
2. Once the problem has been fixed,
push the Clear button to clear the
Alarm. The Filler/Dispenser resumes
dispensing from where it stopped.
Press the Start button to resume dispense.
(See Fig. 7-24)
FIG. 7-24 FAST DISPENSE ON
Fast Gate Did Not Close Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Fast Dispense Gate does not close at
the end of a cycle, the FAST GATE DID
NOT CLOSE alarm appears on the display. (See Fig. 7-25)
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Fast Dispense Gate is not open at the
time you want to dispense, the FAST
GATE DID NOT OPEN alarm appears on
the display. (See Fig. 7-22)
FIG. 7-22 FAST DISPENSE GATE DID NOT OPEN
ALARM
1.
Determine why the Fast Dispense
Gate did not open and correct the
problem.
90
FIG. 7-25 FAST GATE DID NOT CLOSE
1. Determine why the Fast Dispense
Gate did not close and correct the
problem.
2. Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The RESUME DISPENSE?
display appears. (See Fig. 7-26)
91
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
FIG. 7-26 RESUME DISPENSE? DISPLAY
•
FIG. 7-29 SLOW GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM
1.
Press the Start button to resume dispense.
Slow Gate Did Not Open
2.
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Slow Dispense Gate does NOT
open, the SLOW GATE DID NOT OPEN
alarm appears on the display. (See Fig. 727)
Determine why the Slow Dispense
Gate did not close and correct the
problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The wait timer display appears.
(See Fig. 7-30)
FIG. 7-30 WAIT DISPLAY
Under Dispense/Over Dispense Alarms
FIG. 7-27 SLOW GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM
1. Determine why the Slow Dispense
Gate did not open and correct the
problem.
2. Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The wait timer display appears.
(See Fig. 7-28)
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the target weight is NOT within the target window and you do not have the JOG
function turned ON, the dispense is not
accepted and an UNDERDISPENSE or
OVERDISPENSE alarm appears depending on the alarm condition. (See Fig. 7-31
& 7-32)
FIG. 7-28 WAIT DISPLAY
Slow Gate Did Not Close
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Slow Dispense Gate does NOT
close, the SLOW GATE DID NOT
CLOSE alarm appears on the display. (See
Fig. 7-29)
FIG. 7-31 UNDERDISPENSE ALARM
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
92
IBC/Dispense Alarms
Change IBC Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If there is still no motion. An alarm telling
you to Change IBC appears. (See Fig. 734)
FIG. 7-32 OVERDISPENSE ALARM
•
OVERDISPENSE ALARM, press the
Clear button to clear the alarm. The
Accept the Dispense display appears. (See
Fig. 7-33) At this time you can:
1. Accept the dispense by pressing the
START button.
2. Physically remove some of the material until it meets the target window
requirements and then press the
START button.
3. The instrument returns to the Waiting
ON display, repeats the motion check,
autotares and/or checks the OK to
Dispense processes and begins dispense cycle number 2. (See Fig. 7-33)
FIG. 7-34 CHANGE IBC ALARM
Jog Alarms
Jog Gate Did Not Open Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
The instrument checks to see if the gate of
the vessel opens. If the gate DID NOT
open a JOG GATE DID NOT OPEN
ALARM appears on the display and the
Filler/Dispenser is placed in a hold state.
(See Fig. 7-35)
FIG. 7-33 ACCEPT DISPENSE DISPLAY
•
UNDERDISPENSE ALARM, press the
Clear button to clear the alarm, the Accept
the Dispense display appears. At this time
you can:
1. Accept the dispense by pressing the
START button.
2. Physically add some of the material
until it meets the target window
requirements and then press the
START button.
3. The instrument returns to the Waiting
On Display, repeats the motion check,
autotares and/or checks the OK to
Dispense processes and begins dispense cycle number 2
4. The instrument checks to see if the
gate of the vessel opens.
FIG. 7-35 JOG GATE DID NOT OPEN ALARM
1.
Check to see why the gate did not
open. Correct the problem. Press on
the Clear button to clear the alarm.
(See Fig. 7-36)
FIG. 7-36 TO JOG AGAIN PRESS START DISPLAY
93
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
2.
The Jog sequence resumes from
where the Jog left off when it was
paused.
Jog Gate Did Not Close Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
You might experience a JOG GATE DID
NOT CLOSE ALARM! also. If the JOG
gate does not close the alarm appears. (See
Fig. 7-37)
FIG. 7-40 JOG DISPLAY/COMPLETED ONE JOG
SEQUENCE CHECKING WEIGHT
5.
You can pause the JOG cycle by pushing the Stop button once at any time
during the JOG cycle. The JOG Hold
display appears. (See Fig. 7-41)
FIG. 7-37 JOG GATE DID NOT CLOSE ALARM
1.
2.
3.
Check to see why the gate did not
close. Correct the problem. Press on
the Clear button to clear the alarm.
The Jog sequence resumes from
where the Jog left off when it was
paused. (See Fig. 7-38)
The Filler/Dispenser goes through one
JOG sequence that was previously set
up. (See Fig. 7-38 & 7-39)
FIG. 3-41 JOG PAUSED 1.0 SECOND INTO THE JOG
SEQUENCE
6.
If the gain in weight is still NOT
within the target window, the instrument automatically continues through
the preset JOG sequences until the target window is reached and then continues on to another procedure.
Jog Count Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
FIG. 7-38 JOG 1 DISPLAY
If the JOG sequences are completed and
an UNDERFILL condition still exists, a
JOG count alarm appears telling you that
you have used up the JOGs for this
sequence. (See Fig. 7-42)
FIG. 7-39 JOG DISPLAY/JOG 1 2.0 SECONDS
4.
The instrument continuously checks
to see if the gain in weight is within
the target window. If it is the fill process continues to another procedure.
(See Fig.7-40)
FIG. 7-42 JOG COUNT ALARM
1.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
2.
94
The JOG display reappears asking
you if you want to start the JOG
sequence again. (See Fig. 7-43)
FIG. 7-45 DISCHARGE GATE DID NOT OPEN
ALARM
1.
FIG. 7-43 JOG DISPLAY/JOG AGAIN
3.
4.
If you want the instrument to JOG
again, press the Start button to repeat
the JOG sequence.
If you DO NOT want the instrument
to JOG again, press the Stop button.
The instrument goes to the Fill ON
menu if there are more cycles to complete or the Standby Menu if the JOG
was on the last cycle.
2.
3.
Check to see what is preventing the
discharge gate from opening.
Correct the problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The Awaiting Command to
Discharge display appears.
Clogged Gate Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
Discharge Alarms
Not OK to Discharge Alarm
If during the discharge the discharge gate
becomes clogged, and the Auxiliary is
turned OFF, the CLOGGED GATE
ALARM appears. (See Fig. 7-46)
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the instrument determines that it is NOT
OK to Discharge, a Not OK to discharge
alarm appears. (See Fig. 7-44)
FIG. 7-46 CLOGGED DISCHARGE GATE ALARM
•
FIG. 7-44 NOT OK TO DISCHARGE ALARM
1. Check to see what is causing the Not
OK to discharge alarm to appear.
2. Correct the problem.
3. Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm. The Awaiting Command to
Discharge display appears.
Discharge Gate Did Not Open Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the instrument determines that the discharge gate did not open, the DISCHARGE GATE DID NOT OPEN alarm
appears. (See Fig. 7-45)
If the Auxiliary is turned ON, the clogged
gate alarm appears if the auxiliary time
elapses and the discharge weight equals
zero, within the zero tolerance setting. The
CLOGGED GATE ALARM appears. (See
Fig. 7-46)
Step 1. When the discharge is complete, the instrument
closes the discharge gate and returns to the Fill On
display or the Standby Display depending on the
filling cycle.
Discharge Gate Did Not Close Alarm
- - - - - ALARM CONDITION - - - - •
If the Discharge gate does not close, a
DISCHARGE GATE DID NOT CLOSE
ALARM appears. (See Fig. 7-47)
95
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
FIG. 7-47 DISCHARGE GATE DID NOT CLOSE
ALARM
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check to see what is preventing the
discharge gate from closing.
Correct the problem.
Press the Clear button to clear the
alarm.
The instrument returns to the Fill On
display or the Standby Display
depending on the filling cycle.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
General Troubleshooting Flow Chart Index
Drifting or unstable weight readings
A
Electrical, Mechanical and Configuration
reviews
B
Instabilities on Formerly Operating
System
C
Weight indication will not return to zero
E
Verify individual load sensor operation
F
Trad. Cal - A/D Failure Error
G
Mechanical Inspection
H
Electrical Inspection
J
Load Sensor Installation
K
Weight Display Stops Incrementing
M
Blank Display
N
Display Stuck on a Screen
O
View Input States
R
Forcing Outputs
S
96
97
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
A - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly
Operating Systems
A - STABILITY TEST
A
Confirms the Health of the
internal A/D converter
circuits.
Enter
Diagnostics
STABILITY
TEST
Activate the
test and
review the
results.
PASS
No
There isn’t a port
defined or enabled
The internal A/D
converter has a
hardware problem
Yes
Continue
checking for
mechanical
problems.
B
H
Check
Configuration
settings under
options
B
Cycle power and re-run
the test. If the second
test fails contact:
Hardy Instruments
Technical Support
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
B - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating Systems (Cont’d)
B
Check for
Electrical Stability
OK?
No
B1
No
B2
No
B3
Check for
Mechanical Stability
OK?
Check Configuration
settings for
stability
OK?
Yes
GO TO
K
98
99
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
B1 - Guidelines for Instabilities on Former
Operating Systems (Cont’d)
B1
B1.1
B1.2
Electrical
Physical Grounding All common equipment share a common ground point.
Keep the ground cable length to earth ground as short as possible.
Install a new ground rod if the cable length is excessive
Cable Cuts or breaks in the loadcell cable insulation allow moisture to wick into the cable
and loadpoints. This can setup stray capacitance charges and allow ground
currents to exist. This could create a highly intermittent situation.
B1.3
Vessel, Fill and discharge piping Ground all to a common point to eliminate electrical differences in
potential and static build-up.
B1.4
Loadcells Ground straps must be installed to provide a direct discharge path
to ground around the loadpoints.
B1.5
B1.6
B1.7
Cable Routing Separate high voltage sources and cables from low voltage signal cables.
Stay a minimum of 14 inches from magnetic fields and SCR controls.
Avoid parallel high voltage and signal cable runs.
Cable Shielding Ground low voltage cable shields only at the controller end.
Grounding both cable ends will produce ground currents.
Verify, with an ohm meter, the shield is only grounded at the weight controller.
Disconnect the shield at the controller and check for an pen circuit between
ground and shield. Reconnect the shield to ground and confirm a proper ground
path from the Junction Box to the controller.
Verify the shield is not connected to ground at the Junction Box.
Loadcell cable shields only pass through the Junction Boxes and are not connected
to ground at any point.
Weight Controller - Common AC ground and Chassis grounds.
GO TO
B
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
B2 - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating Systems: Mechanical Stability and Configuration Settings.
100
101
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
C - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly
Operating Systems
C
Check individual load sensors output by
physically lifting the signal wires and
making a reading of that sensors output.
Use a Multi meter and
Record load sensor
data for comparison and
stability.
A load sensor output can be considered stable if
the readings only vary +- 0.01mV. Applying
weight and releasing the weight should show a
very rapid Millivolt change. A slow Millivolt
change can indicate a damaged strain guage.
Lift the signal wires, read and
record the Millivolt reading.
Repeat for each sensor.
Stable?
Inspect the summing junction box for
contamination or damage, and replace if necessary
No
Yes
Yes
Stable?
TEST
COMPLETE
No
Remove and replace any load
sensor determined to be unstable
No
Yes
Stable?
No
If you are unable to isolate the
problem, contact Hardy Technical
Support: 800-821-5831
Insure the problem is not
mechanical. (Review Section B)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
102
C1 - Guidelines for Instabilities on formerly operating systems with Smart Diagnostics
C1
Check individual load sensors output by
using the Smart Diagnostics and
SD summing card
Record load sensor for
comparison and stability
A load sensor output can be considered stable if
the readings only vary +- 0.01mV. Applying
weight and releasing the weight should show a
very rapid Millivolt change. A slow Millivolt
change can indicate a damaged strain guage.
Repeat for each sensor.
Inspect the summing junction box for
contamination or damage, and replace if necessary
Stable?
No
Insure the C2 wires are correctly terminated
even if you do not have C2 load sensors.
The IT communications and testing is
conducted over the C2 lines.
Yes
Yes
Stable?
TEST
COMPLETE
No
Insure the problem is not
mechanical. (Review Section B)
No
Yes
Stable?
No
If you are unable to isolate the
problem, contact Hardy Technical
Support: 800-821-5831
Remove and replace any load
sensor determined to be unstable
103
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
E - Non-Return to Zero
E
The Return to Zero Test is used to determine
whether the instrument can still zero a scale
based on preset parameters. If you pass the
Return to Zero Test you are within the sum of the
preset Motion and Zero Tolerance settings. If you
fail you are outside the sum of the preset Motion
and Zero Tolerance settings. If you fail the test
there may be too much build up on the scale and
you need to clean the scale or you have scale
problems. You should do this test whenever you
cannot zero the scale.
Enter
Diagnostics
Return
to ZERO
Activate the
test and
review the
results.
PASS
No
Clean any material
from the scale
The zero tolerance
level set in
configuration has
been exceeded
Yes
Verify the
individual
load cell
signal outputs
H
Check
mechanical
connections
are correct.
B3
Do not just
recalibrate or
increase the zero
tolerance levels.
Troubleshoot the
scale to why the
zero point has
shifted.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
F - Verify Individual Load Cell Milli-Volt
Readings
Using the load cell certificate, verify the milli volt per volt rating
Example: 3 mV/V load cells will produce approximately 15 mV at full load.
That is 5 volts excitation x 3 mV/V. A scale capacity of 1,000 lbs with 100 lbs
of dead load at empty the load point mV reading should equal 1.5 mV
F
Using a Multimeter
MV
readings
acceptable?
Physically lift the
signal leads to read
each load cell’s
output.
Check individual
load sensor
output mV
readings.
MV
readings
acceptable?
1) No dead load.
Apply load and re-test.
2) Wiring error.
Verify color code using the
load cell certificate.
3) Open bridge circuit.
Disconnect power and verify
load point bridge resistance
reading with an Ohmmeter.
1) Stressed load cell, remove
all load and re-test.
2) Excessive loading.
For additional
testing go to:
H
NO
Check load sensor
NEXT
MV
readings
acceptable?
K
MV
readings
acceptable?
A
Record load
sensor mV
output level for
comparison.
Repeat for all load
sensors
Defective load cell?
Replace and repeat
Test F
MV
readings
acceptable?
YES
TEST COMPLETE
If you were unable to determine the
Milli-volt readings. Go to
K load sharing
or
Contact Technical Support
104
105
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
F(a) - Verify Individual Load Cell Readings
Using Smart Diagnostics
F(a)
SMART DIAGNOSTICS is a built-in system diagnostics
utility that enables the operator to rapidly
troubleshoot a weighing system from the front panel,
PDA or Web Browser of the HI 3030. Used with an HI
SD card you can read each individual load cell in mV,
mV/V and weight to determine if a load sensor is
malfunctioning or not connected.
Enter
Diagnostics
Voltage &
Weight
Read and record
each load cell’s
Signal output
Activate the
test and
review the
results.
Yes
PASS
No
All signal
levels fall
within the +0
to +15mV
range
The Millivolt range is
outside the
+0 to +15 mV range
Millivolt reading is
slow or 0.0 mV. It
may be a negative
reading. Use a multimeter to confirm
Check
Wiring
Apply weight
and insure all
signal voltages
increased the
same amount
No
Replace the load
cell if the unit signal
readings are out of
tolerance.
B
Check for
mechanical
reasons, or replace
load cell
PASS
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
G - A/D Failure Error
106
107
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
H - Mechanical Inspection
H
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Keep flexures on the horizontal
Vertical flexures should be avoided
Do not use flexures to correct for misaligning piping
Do not use hose flexures to make right angle bends
Non-flexed piping should have an unsupported
horizontal run using a ratio of 36 times its diameter.
6) Pipe flexure lengths should be a ratio of 6 times it’s diameter
7) Feed and discharge piping flexed
8) Are the flex joints on the correct side of the valve?
(a) You weigh the output valve, not the input valve
(b) Does the weigh scale see all the product to be weighed?
(C) If the product applies a force to a valve or pipe so that
pipe or valve must be included in the weigh vessel.
(d) Proper positioning of the flexures are key.
(E) Your vessel must seem to float.
H1
All pipes and conduits
flexible?
H2
Mechanically Isolated
from ladders and
connecting structures?
H3
Are the load cells
properly mounted?
1)
2)
3)
4)
H4
Are Check Rods
installed to dampen
vessel movement?
1) Protects the load cells from overload and impact forces
2) Limits the movement of the vessel.
3) Rods must be loose and not interacting with the vessel.
H5
Are cables routed
properly?
H6
Housekeeping
To
Verify Electrical
Go to
J
1) Floors or structures do not interact.
2) Local traffic does not interact.
3) Protected from forklifts and adjacent processing equipment
Level, solid mounting base
The load cell is mounted right side up.
All load cell bolts installed using anti-seize compounds.
Mechanically aligned to compensate for expansion and contraction.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Separate conduit for low and high voltage cables.
Do not bundle low voltage with high voltage cables.
Maintain at least 3 inches of separation.
Maintain 14” separation from magnetic fields and 440 VAC.
Cables are in conduit or tied up and protected from damage.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Product, tools and production aids are off the vessel.
No workers are physically on the scale.
Must protect equipment from environmental damage
Make sure openings are sealed to keep water and environmental
contaminates from damaging:
(a) Instrument Cabinet or Enclosure
(b) Summing Card
(c) Load Cells
(d) Conduit Runs
(e) Covers are properly installed
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
J - Electrical Inspection
DO NOT POWER UP THE CONTROLLER UNTIL
INPUT VOLTAGES CAN BE VERIFIED!
J
J1
Verify the proper
voltage level has been
supplied.
J2
Apply power to the
controller only if supply
voltage is correct.
J3
Does the scale reflect
a weight change?
J4
Cabling
1) Check the specification label attached to the weight controller
chassis. (110 VAC/220 VAC or 24 VDC)
2) Use a meter to verify neutral, ground and Hot are proper.
3) Computer grade power
4) Use active filters for motor noises and spikes.
5) Use isolation transformers to combat surges and sags.
6) Isolated from SCR and motor control circuits
7) Use a common earth ground.
a) Keep ground cable runs as short as possible
b) Excessive ground cable runs can act as an antenna
for AC noise.
c) Install grounding straps around load cells to direct
static away from the load cell and directly to ground.
d) Install ground straps on the input and discharge
piping, and the vessel to a common earth ground
1) Verify the front display illuminates.
2) Completes the Initialization process.
3) Displays a weight reading. This weight value will not be
correct if a calibration procedures were not performed.
Apply weight to the vessel
a) Does the weight increase and decrease in the
correct direction with the weight?
B) Is the weight reading repeatable?
C) The weight value will not be correct until a proper
calibration is completed.
1) Verify color code, input is excitation, Output is signal.
2) Shielding
a) Grounded only at the controller
b) Continuous shield connection from the load cell cable
to the instrument. Single point EMI/RFI drain.
c) Terminated but not grounded, at the summing box.
3) Sense lines Installed?
A) Jumpers or sense lines in the J1 connector?
B) Sense lines must be installed for C2 calibration.
4) Using a multimeter verify readings.
108
109
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
K - Load Sharing and Load Sensor Checkout
K
K1
K2
Verify the p rope r
voltag e level has been
su pplie d
A pply pow er to th e
con trolle r only if s upply
voltag e is cor r ect.
1) Does the mV signal increase in a positive
direction?
2) If you receive a negative result, check if load cell
is mounted correctly.
a) The arrow goes with the direction of the force.
b) If there isn’t an arrow, you must manually verify the
correct direction. A negative reading indicates the
load cell is upside down.
c) Load cells in tension will not reflect a negative reading
if installed upside down. If upside down, only the
force applied by the cable would be included in the
weight readings.
D) If you are still receiving a negative signal, verify the
Load cell wire color code.
1) Verify a positive reading from each load cell, using a multi
meter.
2) Record the mV reading and compare each corner for proper load
sharing.
a) Proper load sharing should see only a difference of +/- .5 mV.
b) Larger differences due to motors and piping, should not
exceed +/- 4 mV.
c) If there aren’t any motors, valves or piping to explain the mV
difference, adjust the corners and balance the MV readings.
D) Use shims or if equipped adjusting bolts on the load cell
Mounting Hardware.
E) Drawing a load cell map will help determine the correct
leg to adjust and in which direction.
Three Load Cells Balance Like a Three Legged Chair
1) Using a spirit level, verify the vessel is vertically and horizontally
correct.
2) Verify if any height change effects the attitude of adjacent
vessels or piping.
3) Adjust each leg to dynamically match mV outputs.
4) Verify the mV readings and physical level when complete.
Four Load Cells or More Present a Challenge
Monitor system for proper
operation
Check out complete
1) Use a multi meter:
Determine the sum of the load cell signals and
Your target mV setting for each load cell.
2) Read the output of individual load cells.
3) Adjust the load cell with the lowest reading to dynamically
match the target mV readings obtained in step 1.
4) Read the mV readings from each load cell to verify proper
correction.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to achieve a proper load sharing vessel.
6) Verify the mV readings and vessel level when complete.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
M - Weight Reading Stops Incrementing
Weight Reading is Frozen at Zero or a High Weight Reading
M
The load sensor output signal has exceeded the millivolt limits set
in Configuration and/or the internal factory setting.
1) Verify the signal wires are properly connected.
a) Verify load cell cable color code
(1) Load Cell Certificate.
(2) Installation Manual
(3) Cable marking strips
b) Broken signal wires act as antenna for EMI/RFI.
c) Load cell cable shields must be grounded only at the
controller to dampen EMI/RFI signals.
2) The load cell output signal voltage has exceeded 15 mV DC
a) Use a multimeter to verify mV levels.
B) Verify individual load cell milli-volt signals.
(1) An individual load cell may be over-ranged
and exhibit high milli-volt readings.
(2) Possible physical damage to the load cell
(3) Internal strain gauge bond broke.
(4) Moisture in the load cell cable or body.
3) Weight in the hopper exceeds the configuration Scale Capacity setting.
A) Under configuration verify the Scale Capacity setting.
B) 105% of the scale capacity setting will cause a HI indication.
C) This is used only as a warning and does not effect calibration.
D) Optional communication signals are unaffected by this indication.
4) Weight in the hopper exceeds the load cell capacity
a) Mechanical forces or product acting on the scale overloads the
load cells.
B) Use a multimeter to verify the milli-volt levels.
5) Review Mechanical and Electrical Flow charts for additional tips. B1
Error ?
Yes
No
Contact
Technical Support
Proceed with
Calibration
110
111
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
N - Blank Screen
N
Measure AC Power
at J6
OK?
Measure the excitation
voltage at J1
5 VDC?
No
No
1) Check for proper power at the
source connection.
2) Check the circuit breaker at the
source.
Check the power fuse located inside
the case
OK?
Yes
Contact
Hardy Instrument
Technical Service
800-821-5831
No
Disconnect all the
connectors from the
back panel except
power.
Measure the
Excitation voltage
at J1
5 VDC?
Replace the 2.5
amp slo-blow fuse
and supply power.
Does the fuse blow
out again?
Yes
1) Reconnect the jacks one
at a time checking the 5 VDC
excitation.
2) If reconnecting any jack
effects the 5 VDC, check for
wiring errors.
No
Yes
Display OK
Monitor system for proper
operation
Check out complete
No
Contact Technical
Service
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
O - Display Stuck on a Screen
O
Power Down then Power Up
Able to
change Screen?
Yes
No
Remove all connectors
Other than the power connector
Able to
change Screen?
Yes
No
Disconnect the power cable.
Remove the back plate with
printed circuit boards. Push
the EPROM down into its
socket until it is securely seated.
Able to
change Screen?
Yes
No
Contact Technical Service
1-800-821-5831
Monitor system for proper
operation
Check out complete
112
113
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
R - View Input States
R
The Input States display shows
whether or not the instrument
has any inputs activated. This
provides a way of testing the
inputs before actually starting
the process.
Enter
Diagnostics
STABILITY
TEST
Activate the
test and
review the
results.
PASS
No
These are dry contact
closures. Allowing
110 VAC in the input
will damage the unit.
Verify contact is
being made between
the connector
common to the input
desired.
Contact Hardy
Technical
Support for
repair.
Use a jumper to
physically make the
connection and verify
operation.
Yes
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
114
S - Forcing Outputs
S
Enter
Diagnostics
STABILITY
TEST
The Force Output function individually
activates each of the 4 Output relays in the
instrument. Useful in pre-startup to determine
that all the relays are connected to the correct
auxiliary devices
Activate the
test and
review the
results.
WARNING: Forcing the output relay may cause
damage or personal injury. Make absolutely sure
you know what the relay is connected to before
activating. If you are unsure, do a physical check
to determine what the selected relay is connected
to BEFORE activating
The relay will
activate. Therefore
activating any
machinery attached.
These are Opto
isolated solid-state
relays, switching 110240 VAC. They will
not work as a dry
contact closure
Verify voltage is
being provided. The
controller will not
supply the switching
voltage
Repeat for
each output
Contact Hardy
Technical
Support
Use an AC meter to
physically verify
operation
PASS
Yes
No
115
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
System Integrity Check and Fault Determination From the Front Panel
To determine if an instrument or cabling problem exists, verify the basic operation of the system by performing the following system checks.
Diagnostics
About Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menus enable the technician to get a more
complete view of how the Filler/Dispensing/IBC system is
working. For example you can check to see the last Calibration, the type of calibration and when the last Calibration
was performed. You can view the Data List Display for the
Serial Number assigned to the instrument or Program Part
Number. You can also check the last graduation size, Units
selected, Operator ID, Analog Options and more information
about the configuration of the instrument you are checking.
You can get information about the Load Sensors such as Output Sensitivity, Hysteresis, Sensitivity of each individual
Load Sensor. Many of the Menu Items will allow you to
change them. If a Menu Item has an asterisk (*) in front of it
then you can change this item. The Diagnostic Menus allow
you to perform a Self Test which provides the total scale
input to the instrument such as mV and Weight, mV/V and
Weight and mV/V for the units selected (i.e. lbs, kg, oz, g).
Checking the Device Data List
The Device Data List is a list of all the parameters that were
set for the ingredient you are currently using and the instrument parameters that have been set for this instrument.
Step 1. From the Standby Display press the Test/9 button.
The Test and Data Menu appears with the cursor in
front of Device Data List. (See Fig. 7-48)
FIG. 7-49 TEST DATA DISPLAY/INSTRUMENT ID MODEL NUMBER - S/N
Step 3. Here you can view the Instrument ID, Model Number and Instrument Serial Number of the instrument. This is a read only display. To change any of
the parameters you will have to go to the Setup
Menu/Instrument ID.
Step 4. Press the down arrow button until the next three
parameters appears. (See Fig. 7-50)
FIG. 7-50 TEST DATA DISPLAY/PROGRAM VERSION/LAST CAL TYPE
Step 5. These are read only displays. The information is
important:
•
•
FIG. 7-48 TEST AND DATA MENU/SELECTING
DEVICE DATA LIST
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Device Data List Display appears with the cursor in front of Instrument
ID. (See Fig. 7-49)
•
PP# = Program Part Number. This is the
part number of the firmware. To order
additional copies of the firmware you will
need this number. This is also additional
information available to a service technician for troubleshooting.
Often a technician needs to know the program version to determine if the correct
version is being used. A Hardy Technical
Support Technician will ask what version
of software you are currently using to
determine the source of a problem. You
can find the version here.
The Last Cal Type will tell you what Calibration was done on the instrument. This is
important when you are not getting the
readings you configured the instrument
for.
Step 6. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-51 & 7-52)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
116
Step 10. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *WAVERSAVER. This display shows the
last WAVERSAVER selection.
•
•
•
FIG. 7-51 TEST DATA/LAST CALIBRATION TIME
Press the left or right arrow buttons to
select the WAVERSAVER selection you
want.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter.
Step 11. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-54)
FIG. 7-52 TEST DATA/LAST CALIBRATION DAY/
MONTH/YEAR
•
The Last Cal time is important to determine if the instrument needs calibration to
correct a problem with the scale. If a calibration has not been done for a long time it
is time to re-calibrate the instrument.
Step 7. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-53)
FIG. 7-54 TEST DATA DISPLAY/GRADUATION
SIZE - SPAN VALUE - ZERO COUNT
Step 12. The Span Value is read only. The Graduation Size
and Zero counts are for the last calibration only.
The *Grad (Graduations) and *Zero Count can be
changed.
Step 13. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Grad.
•
•
•
FIG. 7-53 TEST DISPLAY/CALIBRATOR - UNITS WAVERSAVER®
Step 8. The Calibrator is read only. However you can
change the Units and the WAVERSAVER settings
from this menu.
Step 9. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Units.
Step 14. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of Span Value. The Span Value is the value
entered for the last calibration only.
Step 15. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Zero Count.
•
•
•
•
This display shows the last selected Unit.
Press the left or right arrow buttons to
select the Units you want. The selections
are lbs, kg, oz, g.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
This display shows the last selected Graduation size. Press the left or right arrow
buttons to select the Units you want. The
selections are 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200,
500, 1000.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
•
•
NOTE:
Changing the Zero Count can nullify your
calibration.
The Zero Count is the stored A/D counts
on the last calibration zero.
To clear the Zero Count press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Zero counts must be less than Span counts.
•
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
117
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
•
•
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
If you get an error during calibration,
change Zero Count to 500,000 to clear the
calibration error, then recalibrate.
Step 20. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Scale Capacity.
•
•
Step 16. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-55)
•
•
•
The Scale Capacity is the weight capacity
of the scale being used in this Filler/Dispenser/IBC application.
To change the Scale Capacity press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad to enter a
new the full scale capacity.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 21. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-56)
FIG. 7-55 TEST DATA DISPLAY/SPAN COUNT - C2
SENSITIVITY - SCALE CAPACITY
Step 17. *Span Count, *C2 Sensitivity, *Scale Capacity can
all be changed.
Step 18. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Span Count.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing the Span Count can nullify your
calibration.
The Span Count are the A/D counts on the
last C2 (full scale) or Traditional (Span)
calibration.
To clear the Span Count press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Change the Span Count to a large number
to clear calibration errors, then re-calibrate.
Span Counts must be larger than the zero
counts.
Step 19. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *C2 Sensitivity.
•
•
•
•
•
The C2 Sensitivity is the full scale output
sensitivity of C2 load sensor measured at
the factory.
To change the sensitivity press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the sensitivity specifications that comes
with new load sensors and enter the full
scale output sensitivity of the C2 load sensors.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
FIG. 7-56 TEST DATA DISPLAY/ZERO TOLERANCE
- AUTO ZERO TOLERANCE - AUTO ZERO TIME
Step 22. *Zero Tolerance, *Auto Zero Tolerance, *Auto
Zero time can all be changed from this menu.
Step 23. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Zero Tolerance.
•
NOTE:
The Zero Tolerance is the variance in
gross weight to declare that a discharge is
complete in a Filler operation.
Dispenser and IBC use timed discharges.
•
•
•
•
To clear the Zero Tolerance press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the new Zero Tolerance.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 24. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Auto Zero Tolerance.
•
•
•
The Auto Zero Tolerance are the allowable
units from calibration zero to zero at start,
when Auto Zero Tolerance is ON.
To change the Auto Zero Tolerance press
the Clr (Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the new Auto Zero Tolerance.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
•
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 25. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Auto Zero Time.
•
•
•
•
The Auto Zero Time is the maximum
number of seconds that it takes the Auto
Zero to complete.
To change the Auto Zero Time press the
right or left arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the time.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 26. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-57)
FIG. 7-57 TEST DATA DISPLAY/TARE LIMIT MOTION TOLERANCE - AVERAGES
Step 27. *Tare Limit, *Motion Tolerance, *Averages can all
be changed from this menu.
Step 28. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Tare Limit.
•
•
•
•
•
The Tare Limit is the maximum net weight
value that can be reduced (tared) to zero.
To clear the Tare Limit press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the new Tare Limit.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 29. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Motion Tolerance.
•
•
•
The Motion Tolerance is the allowable
deviation between consecutive weight
readings, to confirm filling or dispensing
is active.
To change the Motion Tolerance press the
Clr (Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the new Motion Tolerance.
•
•
118
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 30. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Averages.
•
•
•
•
•
The Averages is the Number of weight
readings used to compute displayed
weight.
To change the Averages press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the new Averages.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 31. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-58)
FIG. 7-58 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/
INGREDIENT - FILL CYCLES - TARGET WEIGHT
Step 32. *Ingredient, *Fill Cycles and *Target Weight can be
changed from this menu.
Step 33. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Ingredient.
•
•
•
To select the ingredient press the right or
left buttons until the ingredient you want
to view or change appears.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 34. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Fill Cycles.
•
•
•
•
The Fill Cycles are the number of fills to
complete one cycle.
Press the right or left buttons to increase
the number of fills per cycle.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
Step 35. Press the up or down arrow until the cursor is in
front of *Target Weight.
119
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
•
•
•
•
•
The Target Weight is the weight you want
for each fill.
To change the Target Weight press the Clr
(Clear) button.
Use the alphanumeric key pad and enter
the new Target Weight.
Press the Enter button to set the entry.
Press the down arrow to move to the next
parameter you want to view or change.
•
•
•
The Target Window (Wt) - is the Target
Window tolerance below the Target Window expressed in Weight.
The Target Window (Wt%+) is the Target
Window tolerance above the Target Window expressed in Percentage.
The Target Window (Wt-) is the Target
Window tolerance below the Target Window expressed in Percentage.
Step 36. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-59)
Step 40. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-61)
FIG. 7-59 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/TARGET PREACT - SMART PREACT - TARGET WINDOW (WT+)
FIG. 7-61 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/JOG
ON TIME - JOG COUNT - JOG OFF TIME
Step 37. Target Preact, Smart Preact and Target Window
Weight (+) are read only.
Step 41. Jog On time - Jog Count - Jog Off Time are read
only.
•
•
•
•
The Target Preact is the value below which
a target gate will close.
Smart Preact is a self adjusting or automatic preact and the user can turn this
function ON or OFF.
The Target Window (Wt) + is the Target
Window tolerance above the Target Window expressed in Weight.
•
•
Jog on Time - This is the amount of time
the feeder will operate in seconds.
The Jog Count - This is the number of jogs
allowed before an alarm is set.
Jog Off Time - This is the amount of time
after a Jog before the net weight is
checked.
Step 42. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-62)
Step 38. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-60)
FIG. 7-62 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/FILL
TIMER - WAIT TIMER - SPEED
FIG. 7-60 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/TARGET WINDOW (WT-) - TARGET WINDOW (WT%+)
-TARGET WINDOW (WT%-)
Step 43. Fill Timer - Wait Timer - Speed are read only.
•
Step 39. Target Window Weight (-) - Target Window Weight
(%+) - Target Window Weight (%-) are read only.
•
Fill Timer - The time in seconds it takes to
complete a fill before an alarm is set.
Wait Timer - The time in seconds after a
fill the instrument waits before net weight
is read.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
Speed - The speed selected for this Ingredient either Single or dual.
•
Step 44. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-63)
120
mode has been selected, Simultaneous or
Sequential.
Slow Fill Proof Switch - If Dual Speed is
selected and Auto Fast is ON this menu
item indicates if the Slow Fill Feeder
Switch is On or Off.
Step 48. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-65)
FIG. 7-63 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/FAST
FILL PROOF SWITCH - FAST FILL PROOF TIMER FAST FILL WEIGHT
Step 45. Fast Fill Proof Switch - Fast Fill Proof Time - Fast
Fill Weight are read only.
•
•
•
Fast Fill Proof Switch - Proof switch for
the fill feeder is either ON or OFF.
Fast Fill Proof Timer - If the Fast Fill
Proof Switch is ON, the set time it takes
for the switch to safely open or close.
Fast Fill Weight - If Dual Speed is selected
the weight set point in which the fast gate
closes.
Step 46. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-64)
FIG. 7-65 TEST DATA DISPLAY/SLOW FILL PROOF
TIMER - PRT BAUD RATE - PORT PARITY
NOTE:
Slow Fill Proof Timer is the last item in the Test
Data Ingredient Menus.
Step 49. Slow Fill Proof Timer - Printer Baud Rate -Printer
Parity are read only.
•
•
•
Slow Fill Proof Timer - If the Slow Fill
Proof Switch is ON, the set time it takes
for the switch to safely open or close.
Printer Baud Rate - Indicates the Baud
Rate for the printer.
Printer Parity - Indicates the parity setting
for the printer (Odd, Even, None).
Step 50. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-66)
FIG. 7-64 TEST DATA INGREDIENT DISPLAY/
AUTO FAST ADJUST - MODE - SLOW FILL PROOF
SWITCH
Step 47. Auto Fast Adjust - Mode - Slow Fill Proof Switch
are read only.
•
•
Auto Fast Adjust - If Dual Speed is
selected it adjusts the Fast Weight value.
this value is the preact weight from the target weight where the fast feed shuts off.
Preact is the pre-activation point where the
valve closes to account for in flight material and valve de-activation timing.
Mode - If Dual Speed is selected it and
Auto Fast Adjust is ON shows which fill
FIG. 7-66 TEST DATA DISPLAY/PRINTER DATA
BITS - NUMBER OF LOAD SENSORS - LOAD SENSOR
Step 51. Printer Data Bits - Number of Sensors -Load Sensor
are read only however you can select a load sensor
to view.
•
Printer Data Bits - Indicates the Data Bit
setting for the printer.
121
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
•
Number of Sensors - The number of sensors detected by the instrument in the Filling/Dispensing system.
f.
1.
g.
2.
3.
4.
Load Sensor -The instrument will
read C2 load sensors certification
information only.
The instrument displays sensor number 1 as a default.
If you want to look at the certified
specifications for other load sensors
press the up or down arrows to move
the list of sensors. The instrument can
detect a maximum of 8 sensors.
To view the certified sensor information which is read from the C2 chip,
do the following:
a.
Press the Enter button. The Load
Sensor Display appears. (See Fig.
7-67)
Input Resistance - This is the
Certified Input Resistance from
the certification done by the factory.
This is the Certified Output
Resistance from the certification
done by the factory.
Step 52. Press the down arrow button until the next three
menu items are displayed. (See Fig. 7-69)
FIG. 7-69 TEST DATA DISPLAY/LOAD SENSOR - IP
ADDRESS - DEVICENET ADR
Step 53. IP Address - Devicenet Address are read only.
•
•
FIG. 7-67 LOAD SENSOR DISPLAY/SERIAL NUMBER - CAPACITY - SENSITIVITY (MV/V)
b.
c.
d.
e.
Serial Number - This is the serial
number of the selected load sensor.
Capacity - the maximum weighing capacity of the load sensor.
Sensitivity - Sensitivity specification of the load sensor set at the
factory.
Press the down arrow until the
remainder of the load sensor
specifications appear. (See Fig. 768)
IP - Lists the IP address for this instrument. The address listed in Fig. 5-69 is the
default IP address of an instrument right
from the factory.
Devicenet Address - Lists the address of
the Node Address of the instrument you
are checking.
Step 54. Press the Exit button to return to the Test Data Display.
Step 55. Press the Exit button to return to the Test and Data
Menu. (See Fig.7-70)
FIG. 7-70 TEST AND DATA MENU
Diagnostics
Voltage & Weight Displays
Step 1. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Diagnostics. (See Fig. 7-71)
FIG. 7-68 SENSITIVITY - INPUT RESISTANCE OUTPUT RESISTANCE
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 7-71 TEST AND DATA MENU/SELECTING
DIAGNOSTICS
FIG. 7-74 MILLIVOL.T AND WEIGHT READING
•
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Diagnostics Display
appears with the cursor in front of Voltage &
Weight. (See Fig. 7-72)
•
FIG. 7-72 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING
VOLTAGE & WEIGHT
Step 3. To see the Voltage and Weight Press the enter button. The Choose Display screen appears. (See Fig.
7-73)
FIG. 7-73 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/CHOOSE DISPLAY SCREEN
The mV and Weight is a coarser reading
than the mV/V and Weight. The reading is
sufficient to balance the corners of your
scale.
This reading allows you to determine if the
problem is in the instrument (internal) or
in a load sensor(s) (external). The specification range for the Filler/Dispenser is 015 mV. If you are getting a reading outside
this range the problem is probably the load
cell (electrical). If you are getting a reading between 0-15 mV the reading is normal.
Step 6. Press the Exit button to return to the Choose Display screen.
Step 7. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of mV/V and Weight.
Step 8. Press the Enter button. The mV/V and Weight Display appears. (See Fig. 7-75)
FIG. 7-75 MILLIVOLT/VOLT AND WEIGHT READING
•
Step 4. Press on the up or down arrow buttons to select the
display you want to see.
Step 5. With the cursor in front of mV and Weight, Press
the Enter button. The mV and Weight display
appears. (See Fig. 7-74)
122
•
•
This reading is a higher resolution reading
to a 10th of a microvolt. Use this reading
to determine if the load cell is working
correctly.
You can also use this reading to determine
which load sensor is malfunctioning by
looking at each load sensor to determine
any problems (e.g. creep) in the millivolt
reading. Multiply the mV/V reading by the
sense voltage to get a mV reading with 3
decimals points.
Converting mV/V to mV use this formula:
5 x mV/V = mV
123
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
Step 9. Press the Exit button to return to the Choose Display.
Step 10. Press the Exit button to return to the Diagnostics
Display.
Stability Test
The Stability Test switches a fixed signal into the analog to
digital convertor, and calculates the mean squared variation
from the average reading, using 100 samples.
The test passes if the mean squared variation is less than 5.0,
and the average reading is between 30237 and 36955.
FIG. 7-78 SYSTEM STABILITY TEST DISPLAY/
PASS
•
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of Stability Test. (See Fig.7-76)
If the instrument does not pass the Stability Test the Fail display appears. (See Fig.
7-79) This means that the Mean Squared
Variation is greater than 5.0 and/or the
average reading is not between 30237 and
36955. This test examines the internal
electronics and not the load cells input signal.
FIG. 7-76 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING
STABILITY TEST
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Information display
appears “SYS. STABILITY TEST, PRESS ENTER
TO START”. (See Fig. 7-77)
FIG. 7-79 SYSTEM STABILITY TEST DISPLAY/FAIL
NOTE:
In our example we show that the Means squared
variation is greater than 5.0 but the average
reading is within tolerance.
1.
Disconnect the power cord and reconnect the power cord to restart the
instrument.
Repeat the Stability test.
If the instrument Fails the Stability
Test again, contact Hardy Instruments
Inc., Technical Support for assistance.
2.
3.
FIG. 7-77 STABILITY TEST DISPLAY
Step 3. Press the ENTER button to perform the stability
test.
•
If the instrument passes the Stability Test
the Pass display appears. (See Fig. 7-78)
This means that the Mean Squared Variation is less than 5.0 and the average reading is between 30237 and 36955. In short
the instrument is working fine.
Step 4. Press the Exit button to return to the Diagnostics
display.
Factory Defaults
CAUTION: IF YOU CHOOSE FACTORY DEFAULTS ALL
MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE THAT THIS
DATA WILL BE LOST!
IS WHAT YOU WANT TO DO BEFORE CHOOSING THIS
OPTION. DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION IN AN EFFORT TO
CORRECT ANY MALFUNCTIONS IN THE OPERATION OF THE
INSTRUMENT.
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of Factory Defaults. (See Fig. 7-80)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
FIG. 7-80 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/FACTORY
DEFAULTS
•
•
Resetting the Default Parameters is used
when you want to change the instrument
from a Filler to a Dispenser or an IBC dispenser and vice versa.
It is required that the security access to this
menu is High (HI).
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Factory Defaults display appears. (See Fig. 7-81)
124
FIG. 7-83 INSTRUMENT SELECTION DISPLAY
Step 7. Press the down arrow button until the cursor is in
front of the instrument you want.
Step 8. Press the Enter button to select the Instrument. The
defaults are set for that instrument.
Return to Zero Test
The Return to Zero Test is used to determine whether the
instrument can still zero a scale based on preset parameters.
If you pass the Return to Zero Test you are within the sum of
the preset Motion and Zero Tolerance settings. If you fail
you are outside the sum of the preset Motion and Zero Tolerance settings. If you Fail the test there may be too much
build up on the scale and you need to clean the scale or you
have scale problems. You should do this test whenever you
cannot zero the scale.
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of Return to Zero. (See Fig. 7-84)
FIG. 7-81 FACTORY DEFAULTS DISPLAY
Step 3. Press the Exit button if you do not want to set the
Factory Defaults. The Diagnostics display reappears.
Step 4. Press the Enter button if you want to set the Factory
Defaults.
Step 5. A display appears telling you to Please Wait.
Step 6. When the Defaults are set you briefly see a display
that says Function OK. (See Fig. 7-82) The Choose
Instrument display automatically appears. (See Fig.
7-83)
FIG. 7-84 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING
RETURN TO ZERO TEST
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Return to Zero Test display appears. (See Fig. 7-85)
FIG. 7-82 FUNCTION OK DISPLAY
FIG. 7-85 RETURN TO ZERO TEST DISPLAY
Step 3. To perform the test press the Enter button. In a few
seconds a display appears telling you if the instrument has passed or failed.
125
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
•
If you Pass the Test the Pass display
appears. (See Fig. 7-86)
FIG. 7-89 INPUT STATES DISPLAY/INPUT 2 AND 4
ACTIVE
FIG. 7-86 RETURN TO ZERO TEST/PASS
•
If instrument Fails the test the Fail display
appears. (See Fig. 7-87) You may need to
do the following:
1.
2.
Check the scale for excess material.
Check your Motion and Zero Tolerance settings. They might be set too
low for your process.
Step 3. Press the Exit button to return to the Diagnostics
display.
Force Outputs
WARNING: FORCING THE OUTPUT RELAY MAY CAUSE
MAKE ABSOLUTELY SURE
DAMAGE OR PERSONAL INJURY.
THAT YOU KNOW WHAT THE RELAY IS CONNECTED TO
BEFORE ACTIVATING. IF INSECTARY DO A PHYSICAL CHECK
TO DETERMINE WHAT THE SELECTED RELAY IS CONNECTED TO BEFORE ACTIVATING.
The Force Outputs function individually activates each of
the 4 Output relays in the instrument. Useful in pre-startup to
determine that all the relays are connected to the correct auxiliary devices.
FIG. 7-87 RETURN TO ZERO/FAIL
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of Force Outputs. (See Fig. 7-90)
Step 4. Press the Exit button to return to the Diagnostics
display.
View Input States
The Input States display shows whether or not the instruments has any inputs activated. A 1 means the input is active
and a 0 means it is not.
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of View Input States. (See Fig. 7-88)
FIG. 7-90 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/FORCE OUTPUTS
Step 2. Press the Enter button. A WARNING display
appears. (See Fig. 7-91)
FIG. 7-88 DIAGNOSTICS/VIEW INPUT STATES
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Input States display
appears. (See Fig. 7-89)
FIG. 7-91 WARNING FOR FORCE OUTPUTS
Step 3. If you are not sure if this is what you want to do or
got here by mistake, press the Exit button.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
•
Step 4. If you are absolutely sure that this is what you want
to do press the Start button. The Output Relay display appears with the cursor in front of Output
Relay #1. (See Fig. 7-92)
126
If you do not want to select another Output
Relay, press the Exit button to return to the
Diagnostics display.
Step 8. Press the Exit button again to return to the Diagnostics display.
FIG. 7-92 OUTPUT RELAY DISPLAY/SELECTING
OUTPUT RELAY #1
Step 5. To select another Output Relay, press the up or
down arrow buttons until the cursor is in front of
the Output Relay you want to force. (See Fig. 7-93)
State Logging
The State Logging function is user selectable and when on,
prints the various states the Filler/Dispenser goes through in
a fill. This will give you a written record of the states the
instrument went through during a Fill or Dispense. This is
useful information when troubleshooting the instrument and
your process.
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of States Logging. (See Fig. 7-95)
FIG. 7-95 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTION
STATE LOGGING - OFF
FIG. 7-93 OUTPUT RELAY DISPLAY/SELECTING
OUTPUT RELAY #2
Step 6. Press the Enter button to activate the output relay
you have chosen. The Output Relay Forced Closed
display appears. (See Fig. 7-94)
Step 2. Use the left or right arrow buttons to toggle
between ON and OFF. If you want to a written
record of the states during a fill or dispense toggle
the State Logging function ON. (See Fig. 7-96)
NOTE:
•
All the output relays on the instrument are
Normally Open so activation will close the
relay.
FIG. 7-94 OUTPUT RELAY #1 FORCED CLOSED
DISPLAY
Step 7. Press the Exit button to return to the Output Relay
Display.
•
If you want to select another Output Relay
do so now.
It is a good idea to turn off Auto print. If Auto
Print is turned ON you will get the fill information plus the Logged States and it can get confusing.
FIG. 7-96 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/STATE LOGGING - ON
Step 3. Each time a state change occurs the State Logging
function will print out the Time in hours, minutes,
and seconds of the change state and the name of the
state.
Step 4. Press the Enter button to set the entry.
127
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
resistance than the 30K snubbing network, or 1.5K ohms. Use less than a
1.67K ohm parallel resistor and now
total load is below 1.5K ohm or
80mA.
Step 5. Press the Exit button until you return to the Standby
Display.
Using Solid State Relays with Light Loads
(Optional Set Relays)
About Solid State Relays With Light Loads
There have been installations where solid state relays have
been used and failed to shut off a solenoid or relay when deenergized. The actual problem comes from the internal snubbing network in parallel with the Silicon Controlled Rectifier
(SCR) which does the actual switching. This network presents an impedance of 30K ohms, which means with 120
volts across, it will pass 4mA of AC current.
HOT
System Integrity Check and Fault Determination From the Web Browser
Diagnostics
Diagnostics is used to troubleshoot the Filler/Dispenser. A
complete Troubleshooting Guide is available in the Service
Manual. What is important for Operational purposes is to be
able to see the information about this instrument. (See Fig. 798)
Setting Default Settings is also useful to operators.
Step 1.
Click on Diagnostics. The Diagnostics Page
appears. (See Fig. 7-98)
SOLID
STATE
RELAY
15000 ohm
RELAY
COIL
NEEDED
SHUNT
NEUTRAL
FIG. 7-97 SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT
1.
2.
The SCR itself presents no leakage
current. Some solid state relay manufactures specify 20mA minimum
load. This is based on the presumption
a relay or solenoid will drop out with
only 4mA through it, which is not
always true. That may not be true.
When switching a light load with a
solid state relay across the line, you
must look at the rated drop-out current
of the load, and if it is less than 4mA
it may not turn off. The solution is to
put a loading resistor in parallel with
the light load, to be sure leakage current is sufficiently shunted away from
the coil.
Assume a load like a relay with a coil
of 15,000 ohms and of 5% of nominal
drop-out. When the solid state relay is
off, there will still be 1/3 of the line
voltages across the relay, so it will not
drop out. For the relay to have 5% of
the line across it, it and a parallel
shunt resistor must be 20 times less
FIG. 7-98 OPERATION/DIAGNOSTICS
Step 2.
Click on “Set Factory Defaults”. The Set Factory
Defaults page appears. (See Fig. 7-99)
FIG. 7-99 SET FACTORY DEFAULTS
WARNING:
ANY AND ALL DATA WILL BE LOST IF FAC-
TORY DEFAULTS ARE INSTALLED. THIS, INCLUDES EVERY
PARAMETER THAT WAS CHANGED FOR INGREDIENTS,
IP
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
ADDRESS, EVERYTHING. THE INSTRUMENT IS RETURNED TO
THE CONDITION IT WAS RIGHT FROM THE FACTORY.
Step 3.
Step 4.
Step 5.
Step 6.
Enter the High Security Code Number.
Click on the Return to Factory Defaults button.
The Confirmation Page appears. (See Fig. 7-100)
The page informs you that all Factory default
have been set and asks you to select what type of
instrument you want this instrument to be.
Click on the pull down menu and select the type
of instrument you want this instrument to be.
128
Step 3. Press the Enter button. The Smart Diagnostics Display appears with the cursor in front of Voltage &
Weight. (See Fig. 7-103)
SMARTDIAGNOSTICS
> Voltage & Weight
Stabil ity Test
Factor y Def aults
->
->
->
FIG. 7-102 SMART DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/
SELECTING VOLTAGE & WEIGHT
Step 4. Smart Diagnostics enables you to read total or individual load sensor’s Millivolt, Millivolt/Volt or
Weight Reading.
•
FIG. 7-100 FACTORY DEFAULTS SET/SELECT
APPLICATION TYPE
NOTE:
•
This procedure is useful when you want to convert the instrument from a filler to a dispenser or
IBC dispenser and vice versa.
Step 7.
Click on the Save button to set the factory
defaults for the application you selected.
Step 8.
Click on “Back” to return to the previous page.
The previous page appears.
Step 9.
Click on the left arrow to return to the Operation
Diagnostics page.
Step 10. Click on Home to return to the Filler/Dispenser
Home Page.
Smart Diagnostics
Using Smart Diagnostics From the Front Panel
Step 1. Press the Test/9 button. The Test and Data Menu
appears. (See Fig. 7-101)
The mV reading is a coarser reading than
the mV/V or Weight. The mV reading is
sufficient to balance the corners of your
scale or vessel.
These readings allow you to determine if
the problem is in the instrument (internal)
or in a load sensor(s) (external). The specification range for the instrument is 0-15
mV. If you are getting a reading outside
this range (15.5 mV, 3.1 mV/V Maximum
or any negative values) the problem is
exterior to the Instrument (most likely
improper wiring). If you are getting a reading between 0-15 mV the reading is normal.
Step 5. To view the total Millivolt readings for all the load
sensors that are connected to the scale, press the up
or down arrow buttons until the cursor is in front
Voltage & Weight.
Step 6. Press the Enter button. The total millivolt reading
for the scale appears. (See Fig. 103)
VOLTAGE& WEIGHT
12.0 Mv - >
ALL 3.0 mV/ V - >
ALL
72.0 l b ->
> ALL
FIG. 7-103 TOTAL MILLIVOLT READING
FIG. 7-101 TEST AND DATA MENU/SELECTING
DIAGNOSTICS
Step 2. Press the down arrow until the cursor is in front of
Diagnostics. (See Fig. 7-102)
NOTE:
The values listed here are for illustration purposes only. Your readings will be different.
Step 7. To view individual millivolt readings for individual
load cells:
129
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
•
•
Press the Down or Up Arrow button until
the cursor is in front of ALL/mV. (See Fig.
103)
Press The Enter button. The individual
Channel/millivolt readings appear. (See
Fig. 104)
> Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
3.0 mV
3.0 mV
3.0 mV
3.0 mV
FIG. 7-104 INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL DISPLAY/MILLIVOLTS
•
•
•
•
If all the load sensor readings are 0.00 mV
there is something wrong between the HI
3000 and the load sensors. The cable(s) is
disconnected or something is wrong. It is
not transmitting the Millivolt readings to
the instrument.
If you do not get a reading for one or possibly two or more load sensors (Channel 3
for example reads 0.00 mV or the millivolt
reading is either larger or smaller than it
should be) and you know that the Load
Sensors are connected to the instrument,
the individual load sensor cable is disconnected from the load sensor or the load
sensor is malfunctioning.
With this information you can quickly
determine what the problem is and where
it is located either from the Front Panel or
Web Browser.
If the Millivolt readings are not fine
enough to determine the problem select
the Millivolt/Volt readings.
Step 8. Press the Exit button to return to the Totals Display.
(See Fig. 105)
Step 9. To read the Millivolt/Volt reading for finer troubleshooting, press the down arrow until the cursor is in
front of the Millivolt/Volt (mV/V) reading for the
selected scale. (See Fig. 105)
VOLTAGE& WEIGHT
ALL
12.0 Mv - >
> ALL 3.0 mV/ V - >
ALL
72.0 l b ->
FIG. 7-105 TOTAL MILLIVOLT/VOLT READING
Step 10. Press the Enter button. The Scale Millivolt/Volt for
individual Scale Load Sensor readings display
appears. (See Fig. 7-106)
> Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
.75 mV/ V
.75 mV/ V
.75 mV/ V
.75 mV/ V
FIG. 7-106 INDIVIDUAL MILLIVOLT/VOLT
DISPLAY
•
•
•
•
If all the load sensor readings are 0.00 mV/
V there is something wrong between the
HI 3000 Series instrument and the load
sensor. The cable is disconnected or something is wrong such that it is not transmitting the Millivolt/Volt readings to the
instrument.
If you do not get a reading for one or possibly two or more load sensors (Channel 3
for example reads 0.00 mV/V or the millivolt/Volt reading is either larger or smaller
than it should be) and you know that the
Load Sensors are connected to the instrument, the individual load sensor cable is
disconnected from the instrument or the
load sensor is malfunctioning or the cable
is broken.
With this information you can quickly
determine what the problem is and where
it is located either from the Front Panel or
Web Browser.
If the Millivolt/Volt readings are not fine
enough to determine the problem select
the Weight readings.
Step 11. Press the Exit button to return to the Totals Display.
(See Fig. 7-107)
Step 12. To read the Weight reading for finer troubleshooting, press the down arrow until the cursor is in front
of the Weight (lb, kg, gr, oz) reading total for the
scale. (See Fig. 7-107)
VOLTAGE& WEIGHT
ALL
17.20 mV
ALL
3.970 mV/ V
> ALL 72.00 l b
->
->
->
FIG. 7-107 SCALE WITH TOTALS/WEIGHT (LB)
SELECTED
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Step 13. Press the Enter button. The Scale Weight for the
individual Scale Load Sensor display appears. (See
Fig. 7-108)
>
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
1
2
3
4
Step 2. Press the Enter button. The Information display
appears “SYSTEM STABILITY TEST, PRESS
ENTER TO START”. (See Fig. 7-110)
SYSTEMSTABILITY TEST
Pr ess ENTERt o t est
16.02 l b
16.03 l b
16.02 l b
16.00 l b
FIG. 7-110 STABILITY TEST DISPLAY
FIG. 7-108 INDIVIDUAL WEIGHT DISPLAY
•
•
•
If you do not get a reading from one of the
load sensors, either the cable to the load
sensor is disconnected or the load sensor is
malfunctioning.
If one of the load sensors is reading higher
or lower than the other load sensors in
your system and you know that you calibrated the instrument and cornered the
scale, there is something wrong with the
load sensor.
If one of the load sensors is reading higher
or lower than the other load sensors and
you do not know if the scale has recently
been calibrated, re-calibrate the scale then
check the Voltages and Weights again.
Step 3. Press the ENTER button to perform the stability
test. The display indicates Testing. (See Fig. 7-111)
!TESTING!
Pr ess Enter to Test
FIG. 7-111 STABILITY TEST/TESTING DISPLAY
•
Stability Test
The Stability Test switches a fixed signal into the analog to
digital convertor, and calculates the mean squared variation
from the average reading, using 100 samples.
The test passes if the mean squared variation is less than 5.0,
and the average reading is between 30237 and 36955.
NOTE:
Before performing the Stability Test check to see
if all the Channels have been enabled from the
Web Browser.
Step 1. Press the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor
is in front of Stability Test. (See Fig.7-109)
>
->
->
->
FIG. 7-109 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY/SELECTING
STABILITY TEST
The results of the Stability Test are displayed for this scale as PASS. (See Fig. 7112) This means that the Mean Squared
Variation is less than 5.0 and the average
reading is between 30237 and 36955. In
short the instrument is working fine.
SYSTEMSTABILITY TEST
Test Resul t s: PASS - >
Mean Sq. Var
2.37
Mean ADCCount 34k
FIG. 7-112 SYSTEM STABILITY TEST DISPLAY/
PASS
•
SMARTDIAGNOSTICS
Vol t age& Weight
> St abil it y Test
Fact or y Def aul t s
130
The test results shown are for all four
Channels. If you want to see the results for
each individual channel, press the down or
up arrow buttons until the cursor is in front
of Test Results: PASS. Press the Enter button to see the test results per channel. (See
Fig. 7-113)
131
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
> Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
1
2
3
4
PASS - >
PASS - >
PASS - >
PASS - >
FIG. 7-113 TEST RESULTS PER CHANNEL
•
To see the individual results for Channel 1,
press the up or down arrow buttons until
the cursor is in front of the channel you
want to view. Press the Enter button to see
the individual Stability Test results for the
selected Channel, in our example Channel
1. (See Fig. 114)
> Channel
1
2
3
4
Channel
Channel
Channel
PASS - >
PASS - >
FAIL - >
PASS - >
FIG. 7-115 STABILITY TEST RESULTS/CHANNEL 3
FAILED
NOTE:
If the result for a Channel shows N/A it means
that this channel is inactive.
STABILITY TEST
CH3
> Test Result: FAIL
STABILITY TEST
CH1
T
est
Resul
t
s:
PASS
->
>
Mean Sq. Var
2.37
Mean ADCCount 34k
FIG. 7-114 TEST RESULTS FOR CHANNEL 1
•
•
•
If the channel does not pass the Stability
Test the FAIL display appears. This means
that the Mean Squared Variation is greater
than 5.0 and/or the average reading is not
between 30237 and 36955. This test examines the internal electronics and not the
load cells input signal.
The test results shown are for all four
Channels. If you want to see which channel(s) failed the test, press the down or up
arrow buttons until the cursor is in front of
Test Results: FAIL. Press the Enter button
to see the test results per channel. (See Fig.
7-116) In our example channel 3 failed.
To see the results of the failed channel, use
the up or down arrow buttons until the cursor is in front of Channel 3. Press the Enter
button to see the individual results for
Channel 3.
Mean Sq Var
Mean ADCCount
->
2.37
39k
FIG. 7-116 STABILITY TEST RESULTS/CHANNEL 3
MEAN ADC COUNT IS OUT
•
The Stability Test display a Mean ADC
count is outside the range of 30237 and
36955. Now you know which channel is
not reading correctly. Do the following:
1.
1.
2.
Disconnect the power cord and reconnect the power cord to restart the
instrument.
Repeat the Stability test.
If a channel Fails the Stability Test
again, contact Hardy Instruments Inc.,
Technical Support for assistance.
Step 4. Press the Exit button to return to the Diagnostics
display.
Using Smart Diagnostics From the Web
Browser
Step 1. From the Home Page click on Operation. (See Fig.
7-117) The Operation Choose One page appears.
(See Fig. 7-118)
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
132
Step 3. Click on Weight and Voltage. (See Fig. 7-119) The
Operation/Diagnostics - Weight & Voltage page
appears with all four (4) channels (Inputs) with the
Sense Voltages, Millivolts, Millivolts/Volt, A/D
counts and Gross Weight displayed. (See Fig. 7120)
NOTE:
To differentiate between a unit with regular diagnostics and Smart Diagnostics (-SD) option card,
the regular diagnostics has only one input. Smart
Diagnostics has 4 inputs.
FIG. 7-117 HOME PAGE/SELECTING OPERATION
Step 2. Click on Diagnostics. (See Fig. 7-118) The Operation-Diagnostics Page appears with the four (4)
scales listed. (See Fig. 7-119)
FIG. 7-120 OPERATION - SMART DIAGNOSTICS/
WEIGHT AND VOLTAGE PAGE
FIG. 7-118 OPERATION - CHOOSE ONE/SELECTING DIAGNOSTICS
NOTE:
The values expressed here are for illustration
purposes only. Your values will be different.
NOTE:
The Weight and Voltage Web page shows all the
Weight, Voltage and A/D values at once. So if you
want to save time use the Web Browser, Smart
Diagnostics, Weight and Voltage Page for troubleshooting.
•
•
The mV reading is a coarser reading than
the mV/V or Weight readings. The mV
reading is sufficient to balance the corners
of your scale or vessel.
These readings allow you to determine if
the problem is in the instrument (internal)
or in a load sensor(s) (external). The specification range for the Weight Controller is
0-15 mV. If you are getting a reading outside this range (15.5 mV, 3.1 mV/V Maximum or any negative values) the problem
is exterior to the Instrument (most likely
improper wiring). If you are getting a reading between 0-15 mV the reading is normal.
Step 4. Check the results:
FIG. 7-119 OPERATION - SMART DIAGNOSTICS
133
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
•
•
If any or all the load sensor readings are
0.00 there is something wrong between the
HI 3000 and the load cells. The cable(s) is
disconnected or something is wrong with
the such that it is not transmitting the readings to the HI 3000 instrument.
If you do not get a reading for one or possibly two or more load sensors (Sensor 3
for example reads 0.00 or the reading is
either larger or smaller than it should be)
and you know that the Load Sensors are
connected to the instrument, the individual
load sensor cable is disconnected from the
instrument, broken cable or the load sensor
is malfunctioning.
Step 5. With this information you can quickly determine
what the problem is and where it is located either
from the Web Browser, Front Panel.
Step 6. To return to the Operation Smart Diagnostics Page,
click on the back arrow at the bottom of the page.
Overview of Typical Load Cell System
1.
The typical system consists of one or
more load cells/points, a summing
junction box, and an HI 3010 controller. (See Figure 7-121).
FIG. 7-121 TYPICAL LOAD CELL SYSTEM
2.
Load Cell/Sensor/Point - is a strain
gauge based force transducer, which
generates an electrical signal proportional to the load applied to the scale.
Load cells/points can be used any
place a person needs to measure pressure, load, or torque. This can be
accomplished by either Tension or
Compression type load cells/points.
The load cell/point takes as an input
the 5 volts DC Excitation Voltage
3.
generated by the HI 3010, and
depending upon how much weight is
applied to the scale, generates a millivolt output (proportional to the
weight, 0-10mv DC for 2mv/V load
cells/points or 0-15mv DC for 3mv/V
load cells/points).
Weight Controller - is part of the HI
3010 instrument which, among other
functions, is used to power the load
cell(s)/point(s), take the millivolt sig-
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
application and are securely fastened, 64
signals should be returned and the print
out will reflect this fact.
nal output from the load cell(s)/
point(s), and digitize, interpret, communicate and display the results as a
weight indication.
Troubleshooting The Network Connections and Configuration with the "Ping"
Tool
Step 1. The Ping Tool is used from the root directory of the
PC. Get to the Root directory. The Root Directory is
the “C:/” Prompt.
Step 2. If you do not know how to get to the Root Directory, check you Operating System User Guide or
Manual for information on how to get to the root
directory.
Selecting the module by number for Testing
NOTE:
You can only ping from the PC you cannot ping
from an instrument.
Step 1. Type PING <space>IP address of the instrument
you want to test. For Example:
134
NOTE:
NOTE: The Ping utility continues to send out signals (pings) until you exit the Ping Tool.
•
Simultaneously press the <Ctrl> key and
the letter <C> key to stop the signals.
Exiting the Root Directory
Step 1. Type exit at the root directory prompt.
C:/exit
Step 2. Press the Enter key.
About Solid State Relays With Light Loads
There have been installations where solid state relays have
been used and failed to shut off a solenoid or relay when deenergized. The actual problem comes from the internal snubbing network in parallel with the Silicon Controlled Rectifier
(SCR) which does the actual switching. This network presents an impedance of 30K ohms, which means with 120
volts across, it will pass 4mA of AC current.
C:/PING 192.168.110.99
•
In our example we used the default
address for all HI 3000 Series Instruments.
The IP address you are testing will be different.
Step 2. Press the Enter key on the PC.
Step 3. The PING utility starts sending out 56 signals and
64 signals should return if the unit is functioning
correctly.
•
If the instrument or network are configured incorrectly and cables are loose or not
connected correctly, nothing prints out
after the first line. Do the following:
1.
2.
3.
•
SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT
The SCR itself presents no leakage current. Some solid state
relay manufactures specify 20mA minimum load. This is
based on the presumption a relay or solenoid will drop out
with only 4mA through it, which is not always true. That
may not be true. When switching a light load with a solid
state relay across the line, you must look at the rated dropout current of the load, and if it is less than 4mA it may not
turn off. The solution is to put a loading resistor in parallel
with the light load, to be sure leakage current is sufficiently
shunted away from the coil.
Check the Network cables and connectors to be sure they are tightly fastened and the correct cables for this
application.
Check the configuration to be sure
that the instrument is configured correctly. (See Configuration IP Address
in Chapter 6)
Check the Ethernet card to be sure
that is securely seated and that it is
functioning correctly.
If the unit is configured correctly and the
Ethernet card is functioning correctly and
the cables are the correct ones for this
HOT
SOLID
STATE
RELAY
15000 ohm
RELAY
COIL
NEEDED
SHUNT
NEUTRAL
FIG. 7-122 SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT
135
CHAPTER 7
Troubleshooting
Assume a load like a relay with a coil of 15,000 ohms and of
5% of nominal drop-out. When the solid state relay is off,
there will still be 1/3 of the line voltages across the relay, so
it will not drop out. For the relay to have 5% of the line
across it, it and a parallel shunt resistor must be 20 times less
resistance than the 30K snubbing network, or 1.5K ohms.
Use less than a 1.67K ohm parallel resistor and now total
load is below 1.5K ohm or 80mA.
General Policies and Information
With over 70 years of industrial weighing experience and
products in the field, Hardy Instruments continues to design,
manufacture, install and support Hardy products worldwide.
The following paragraphs describe Hardy's customer support
services and equipment warranty.
NOTE:
Before returning any product to Hardy Instruments, call the Technical Service Department
listed below for a Return Authorization Number.
Have your company name, address, telephone,
equipment model number, S/N, and a brief
description of the problem ready to give to him.
In addition, please have Appendix A completed
and ready to FAX to us before calling.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:
Technical Service Manager
Hardy Instruments, Inc.
9440 Carroll Park Drive, Suite 150, San Diego, CA 92121
Telephone: (858) 278-2900
FAX: (858) 278-6700
Web Site: http://www.hardyinst.com
E-Mail: [email protected]
Ordering Replacement Parts
Contact the Hardy Instruments Sales Department to order
replacement parts and option boards. Have your equipment
model number and serial number ready.
System Support
Technical Service is provided as follows:
•
New system start-up: Ensure that the
installation is checked and correct; instruments are calibrated, and operators
trained.
1.
2.
Service: Engineers are trained and
qualified to provide on-site installation, calibration, and maintenance.
On-site training: A Hardy Support
Representative can be scheduled to
train your operations and maintenance
personnel. This can be as simple as
basic load cell theory or as complete
as troubleshooting techniques which
allow you to service your equipment.
Warranty
A warranty problem may be handled by returning the product to the factory for repair or replacement under warranty.
HI-3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
136
135
Appendix A - HI 3010 Complete Mapping Symbols
DICTIONARY OF MAPPING SYMBOLS
Map Dictionary:
CMD0 - Specifies input and output locations for the command interface
e.g. CMD0=DSI25*DSO20
Unit will look for commands starting at DeviceNet input
word 25 and send acknowledgement to output word 20
Please distinguish between digit zero "0", and upper-case
letter "O".
HI, HSI - Hardy Input Table
Bit "y" of word "x" in table is specified as: HIx.y
16-bit word "x" in table is specified as: HSIx
HSI0 = Digital Inputs Word
HI0.0 = Digital Input 1
HI0.1 = Digital Input 2
HI0.2 = Digital Input 3
HI0.3 = Digital Input 4
HI0.4 = Digital Input 5
HSI1 = Instrument-Status Word
HI1.0 = A/D error
HI1.1 = A/D failure
HI1.5 = Real time clock failure
HI1.6 = In Motion
HI1.8 = NVR Failure
HI1.9 = Infrared Failure
HSI2 = Filler/Dispenser Outputs, bits HI2.0 - HI2.15
HI2.0 = Auxiliary Device
HI2.1 = Fast Fill or Fast Dispense
HI2.2 = Slow Fill or Slow Dispense
HI2.3 = Discharge
HI2.4 = Fill Complete or Dispense Complete
HI2.5 = Refill
HI2.6 = Change Bags
HI2.15 = Any Alarm
HSI3 = Filler/Dispenser Outputs, bits HI3.0 - HI3.15
HI3.0 = AutoZero Failed or Bag Change Alarm
HI3.1 = Discharge Gate clogged or Refill Timeout
HI3.2 = Discharge Gate Stuck Open
HI3.3 = Discharge Gate Stuck Shut
HI3.4 = Feed Timeout
HI3.5 = Fast Gate Stuck Open
HI3.6 = Fast Gate Stuck Shut
HI3.7 = Lost OK-to-Fill or Lost OK-to-Dispense
HI3.8 = Jog Count Alarm
HI3.9 = Jog Gate Stuck Open
HI3.10 = Jog Gate Stuck Shut
HI3.11 = Not OK to Discharge
HI3.12 = Not OK to Fill or Not OK to Dispense
HI3.13 = Overfill or Over-Dispense
HI3.14 = Slow Gate Stuck Open
HI3.15 = Slow Gate Stuck Shut
HSI4 = Filler/Dispenser Outputs, bits HI4.0 - HI4.15
HI4.0 = Tare Limit alarm or Over-Refill
HI4.1 = Underfill or Under-Dispense
HI4.2 = Disp Gate Open at Refill
HI4.3 = Refill Stuck Open
HI4.4 = Refill Stuck Shut
HI4.5 = Tare Timeout
HI4.6 = Insufficient Material
HI4.7 = Imbalance
HSI5 = Command Status Word. This 16-bit word holds the
result status of mapped commands.
HSI5.15 = Command Status Data Valid bit. Set when the rest
of the status bits are valid.
HSI6 = Watchdog Word. Each bit represents the corresponding node(bit0=Node0 etc.) sending data. Five seconds after
the last data packet arrives form any node, its bit is set to
zero.
HO - Hardy Output Table
HO0.0 = Output Relay 1
HO0.1 = Output Relay 2
HO0.2 = Output Relay 3
HO0.3 = Output Relay 4
HO0.7 = Software LED
HO2.0 = Do C2 Calibration
HO2.1 = Do Traditional Calibration Low (Zero weight)
HO2.2 = Do Traditional Calibration High (Span weight)
HO2.3 = Clear All Totalizers
HO2.4 = Clear Totalizer 1
HO2.5 = Clear Totalizer 2
HO2.6 = Clear Totalizer 3
HO2.7 = Clear Totalizer 4
HO2.8 = Clear Totalizer 5
HO2.9 = Clear Totalizer 6
HO2.10 = Clear Totalizer 7
HO2.11 = Clear Totalizer 8
HO2.12 = Clear Totalizer 9
HO2.13 = Clear Totalizer 10
HO2.14 = Clear Totalizer 11
HO2.15 = Clear Totalizer 12
HO3.0 = Send Custom Email 0
HO3.1 = Send Custom Email 1
HO3.2 = Send Custom Email 2
HO3.3 = Send Custom Email 3
HO3.4 = Send Custom Email 4
HO3.5 = Send Custom Email 5
HI-3010 Weight Controller
Service Manual
HO3.6 = Send Custom Email 6
HO3.7 = Send Custom Email 7
HO3.8 = Send Custom Email 8
HO3.9 = Send Custom Email 9
HSO - Hardy Short Output table. A table of 16-bit integers.
NOTE:
HSO is a distinct table, and does not refer to HO
in any way.
HSO0 = Cycles Ordered for Active Ingredient, 0=continuous
HSO1 = Ingr. 1 Speed. 0=single, 1=dual
HSO2 = Ingr. 2 Speed
HSO12 = Ingr. 12 Speed
HSO13 = Ingr. 1 Fills or Dispenses
HSO24 = Ingr. 12 Fills or Dispenses
HSO25 = Ingr. 1 Auto Preact On. 0=no, 1=yes
HSO36 = Ingr. 12 Auto Preact On
HSO37 = Ingr. 1 Tolerance Selection, 0=weight 1=percent
HSO48 = Ingr. 12 Tolerance Selection
HSO49 = Ingr. 1 Jog Count (max permitted jogs)
HSO60 = Ingr. 12 Jog Count
HSO61 = Ingr. 1 Fill or Dispense Time (s) (max allowed
time for operation)
HSO72 = Ingr. 12 Fill or Dispense Time (s)
HSO73 = Ingr. 1 Auto Fast On. 0=no, 1=yes (automatic
adjustment of fast wt for dual-speed units)
HSO84 = Ingr. 12 Auto Fast On
HSO85 = Ingr. 1 Fast Gate Time (s). (max time for fast gate
proof sw to verify gate operation)
HSO96 = Ingr. 12 Fast Gate Time (s)
HSO97 = Ingr. 1 Fast Proof Switch On. (0=don't use fast
gate proof sw, 1=use proof sw)
HSO108 = Ingr. 12 Fast Proof Switch On.
HSO109 = Ingr. 1 Slow Proof Switch On. (0=don't use slow
gate proof sw, 1=use proof sw)
HSO120 = Ingr. 12 Slow Proof Switch On.
HSO121 = Ingr. 1 Slow Gate Time (s). (max time for slow
gate proof sw to verify gate operation)
HSO132 = Ingr. 12 Slow Gate Time (s).
HSO133 = OK-to-Fill/OK-to-Dispense timer (s). (max time
to wait for OK-to-Fill signal)
HSO134 = Totalizer On. (0=no, 1=yes.)
HSO135 = Auto Print On. (0=no, 1=yes.)
HSO136 = OK-to-Fill Input. (0=don't wait for OK-to-Fill,
1=do wait for it.)
HSO137 = Discharge Enable. (0=don't enter discharge
sequence, 1=enter discharge sequence)
HSO138 = AutoDischarge Enable. (0=wait for Discharge
command, 1=discharge without waiting for command)
HSO139 = OK-to-Discharge Enabled. (0=don't wait for OKto-Discharge input, 1=wait for it)
HSO140 = Auxiliary Device time (s). (max time allowed for
Auxiliary Device operation)
HSO141 = Discharge Proof On. (0=don't wait for Discharge
Proof Sw., 1=wait for it)
HSO142 = Discharge Gate Timer (s). (max time for discharge proof sw to verify gate operation)
136
HSO143 = Use Auto Zero. (0=don't auto zero, 1=auto zero
when within autozero range of zero)
HSO144 = Refill On. (0=do not attempt refill, 1=refill when
needed)
HSO145 = Initial Refill On. (0=do not attempt refill, 1=refill
before operation)
HSO146 = Active Ingredient Number. (1=ingr 1, 2=ingr 2,
12=ingr 12)
HSO147 = WAVERSAVER setting. (0=Off, 1=7.5Hz,
2=3.5Hz, 3=1.0Hz, 4=0.5Hz, 5=0.25Hz)
HSO148 = Calibration Type. (0=Traditional, 1=C2, -1=not
calibrated)
HFI - Hardy Float Input Table
HFI0 = Gross Weight lb
HFI1 = Net Weight lb
HFI2 = Gross Weight
HFI3 = Net Weight
HFI4 = Tare Weight lb
HFI5 = weight Fraction 1 (with =SD board, fraction of wt
currently on input 1)
HFI6 = weight Fraction 2 (with =SD board, fraction of wt
currently on input 2)
HFI7 = weight Fraction 3 (with =SD board, fraction of wt
currently on input 3)
HFI8 = weight Fraction 4 (with =SD board, fraction of wt
currently on input 4)
HFI9 = capacity
HFO - Hardy Float Output Table
HFO0 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO1 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO2 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO3 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO4 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO5 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO6 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO7 - user-defined floating point variable, saved in nonvolatile RAM
HFO8 - Active Target Weight
HFO9 - Ingr.1 Target Wt
HFO10 - Ingr.2 Target Wt
HFO20 - Ingr.12 Target Wt
HFO21 - Ingr.1 Preact Wt
HFO32 - Ingr.12 Preact Wt
HFO33 - Ingr.1 Max Wt (Tolerance in wt, above target wt)
HFO44 - Ingr.12 Max Wt
HFO45 - Ingr.1 Min Wt (Tolerance in wt, below target wt)
137
Appendix A - HI 3010 Complete Mapping Symbols
HFO56 - Ingr.12 Min Wt
HFO57 - Ingr.1 Max % (Tolerance in %, above target wt)
HFO68 - Ingr.12 Max %
HFO69 - Ingr.1 Min % (Tolerance in %, below target wt)
HFO80 - Ingr.12 Min %
HFO81 - Ingr.1 Jog On Time (s)
HFO92 - Ingr.12 Jog On Time (s)
HFO93 - Ingr.1 Jog Off Time (s)
HFO104 - Ingr.12 Jog Off Time (s)
HFO105 - Ingr.1 Wait Time (s)
HFO116 - Ingr.12 Wait Time (s)
HFO117 - Ingr.1 Fast Target Wt (wt below target wt where
dual unit switches to slow feed)
HFO128 - Ingr.12 Fast Target Wt
HFO129 - Zero Tolerance (wt near zero that can be taken as
zero)
HFO130 - Auto Zero Tolerance (wt near zero that can be
zeroed)
HFO131 - Calibration Low Wt (wt used for "zero" of calibration)
HFO132 - Calibration Span Wt (wt used for "span" of traditional calibration)
HFO133 - AutoZero Tolerance Time (time allowed for
autozeroing)
HFO134 - Tare Limit (max wt that can be tared off)
HTO - Hardy Text Output Table
HTO0 - Operator ID (max 3 chars)
HTO1 - Instrument ID (max 19 chars)
HTO2 - Custom Text0 (max 20 chars)
HTO3 - Custom Text1 (max 20 chars)
HTO11 - Custom Text9 (max 20 chars)
HTO12 - Ingredient 1 Name (max 19 chars)
HTO23 - Ingredient 12 Name (max 19 chars)
HTI - Hardy Text Input Table
HTI0 - Calibrator ID (max 3 chars)
HTI1 - Model Number (max 20 chars)
HTI2 - Program Part Number (max 20 chars)
HTI3 - Firmware Revision Number (max 20 chars)
HII - Hardy Integer Input Table
HII0 - Serial Number
HII1 - Totalizer0 Cycles
HII12 - Totalizer11 Cycles
HDI - Hardy Double Input Table
HDI0 - Totalizer0 Wt
HDI11 - Totalizer11 Wt
DI, DO, DFI, DFO, DSI, DSO, DII, DIO, DTI,
DTO - DeviceNet tables.
DeviceNet tables contain 125 16-bit words.
DI, DO = DeviceNet input/output, addressed as bits
DFI, DFO = DeviceNet input/output, addressed as floats
DSI, DSO = DeviceNet input/output, addressed as 16 bit
integers
DII, DIO = DeviceNet input/output, addressed as 32 bit integers
DTI, DTO = DeviceNet input/output, addressed as text
RI, RO, RFI, RFO, RSI, RSO, RII, RIO, RTI, RTO - RIO
(Allen-Bradley® Remote I/O tables). Used if you have an
RIO option card.
The RIO table is 64 words long, of which the first 32 are
mapped to and from the network.
The rest is used as a scratchpad area for short commands.
NOTE:
The block transfer area immediately follows discrete area, and depends on rack size selected.
RI, RO = RIO input/output, addressed as bits
RFI, RFO = RIO input/output, addressed as floats
RSI, RSO = RIO input/output, addressed as 16 bit integers
RII, RIO = RIO input/output, addressed as 32 bit integers
RTI, RTO = RIO input/output, addressed as text
CI, CO, CFI, CFO, CSI, CSO, CII, CIO, CTI,
CTO - Communications Network tables.
Used if you have a Communications
option card.
The Communications Input table is 125 words long.
The Communications Output table is 127 words long, but
the first two words are reserved, if ControlNet.
otherwise, 125 words long.
CI, CO = Communications Network input/output,
addressed as bits
CFI, CFO = Communications Network input/output,
addressed as floats
CSI, CSO = Communications Network input/output,
addressed as 16 bit integers
CII, CIO = Communications Network input/output,
addressed as 32 bit integers
CTI, CTO = Communications Network input/output,
addressed as text
HI-3010 Weight Controller
Service Manual
138
Index
Index
Symbols
“Clean” Primary Line
*Scale Capacity 116
17
Numerics
0/(/)/*/+/#/&/’ Button 23
1 to 1 Configuration 81
10/100 Base T Ethernet Connection 45
10/100 BaseT Ethernet 1
14 AWG Power Line 17
2/ABC Button 22
30K Snubbing Network 134
32 Bit Integer 78
32 Bit Integer Analog Variable Types 77
3rd Party I/O 3
-4AN 4
55 Updates Per Second 41
6/MNO Button 23
8/TUV Button 23
9 Terminal Block 18
A
A - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating
Systems 96
A/D Convert Error 85
A/D Counts 115
A/D Failure Error 85
A1 - Guideline for Instablilities on Formerly Operating
Systems (Cont’d) 97
About Basic Mapping 65
About Chapter 2 7
About Configuring Ingredients 24, 47
About Diagnostics 114
About Fill/Dispense Cycles 25
About Fill/Dispense Timer 28
About Instrument ID 31
About IP Addresses 45
About Jog Parameters 27
About Motion Tolerance 39
About OK to Fill Input Parameter 32
About Operator ID 31
About Proof Switch 33
About Setting the Clock 42
About Smart Preact 25
About Solid State Relays With Light Loads 126, 133
About Target Preact 25
About Target Weight 25
About Target Window 26
About the Auxiliary Device Timer 34
About the Averages Parameter 41
About the Decimal Point Parameter 38
About the DeviceNet Parameters 44
About the Discharge Parameters 32
About the Ethernet Parameters 45
About The Gravitation Correction Factor 58
About the Help Dialog 21
About the Refill Parameter 34
About the Scale Capacity Parameter 41
About the Serial Port Setup Parameters 36
About the Speed Parameter 29
About the Swivel/Wall Mount 13
About the Tare Limit Parameter 40
About the Total Decimal Point Parameter 39
About the Totalizer Parameter 37
About the WAVERSAVER Parameter 41
About the Zero Tolerance Parameter 39
About Traditional Calibration 61
About Unit of Measure 38
About Wait Timer 28
-AC 4
AC Power 17
Accept the Dispense 91
Activated 81
Add 78
ADJUST INGREDIENT 24, 81
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O 2, 3, 4
Alphanumeric Character LCD 21
Amount of Deviation 39
Amount/4/GHI 23
Analog 2
Analog Equation 78
Analog Mapping 77
Analog tables 78
Analog Variables 78
AND 77
Application Specific Process Weighing Instruments
Approvals 8
Arrays of Numeric Entities 75
Artificial Zeroing 40
ASCII String 78
Asterisk 82
Auto - Zero Time Field 52
Auto - Zero Tolerance Field 52
Auto Discharge 32
Auto Discharge OFF Radio Button 53
Auto Fast Adjust 119
Auto Print 36
Auto Zero Time 116
Auto Zero Tolerance 116
Auto-Adjusting Preacts 1
Auto-Zero OFF Radio Button 52
Auto-Zero ON Radio Button 52
Aux (Auxiliary) Device Timer 32
Auxiliary Devices 124
Average Reading 122, 129
Averages 7, 117
Averages Parameter 41
Awaiting Command to Discharge Display 94
1
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
B
B - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating
Systems (Cont’d) 97
B1 - Guidelines for Instabilities on Former Operating
Systems (Cont’d) 98
B2 - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating
Systems
Mechanical Stability and Configuration Settings. 99
Back 63
Basic I/O Mapping Menu 82
Basic Load Cell Theory 134
Basic Mapping 81
Basic Mapping Using Hardy Link 65
Baud Rate 36
Baud Rate Pull Down 54
Baud Rates 4
BC (Intermediate Bulk Container) 1
Bi-Directional Communications 6
Binding 57
Blind Mount 21
Block Transfer Commands 6
Boolean Equations 78
Boolean Mapping 77
Boolean Operations 77, 78
Boolean Tables 77
Boolean Variables 78
Booster Power Supply 4
Built-in Smart Diagnostics (Knowledgebase) 2
Built-In Totalizers 1
Button Functions 21
C
C - Guidelines for Instabilities on Formerly Operating
Systems 100
C2 7
C2 Cal Error 85
C2 Cal Type 57, 61
C2 Calibration From the Front Panel 57
C2 Calibration From the Web Page 60
C2 Load Points 18
C2 Load Sensor 116
C2 Load Sensor Certification Data 4
C2 Sensitivity 116
C2 Weighing System 3
C2® Calibration 3
C2® Electronic Calibration 1
C2® Load Point Connection 18
C2® Second Generation Calibration 3
Cable Color Code 18
Cable Color Code for Non-C2 Load Points 18
Cabling and Interconnecting 17
CAL Failed 85
Cal Type 58
Calibration Completed OK 61
Calibration Menu 57, 61
Calibration Page 63
Calibration Procedures 57
Calibration Sub-Menu 60, 63
Calibration Techniques 7
Calibrator 115
Capacity 120
Captive Screws 13
Certified Test Weight 62, 63
Change IBC Alarm 92
Changing the Ingredient Name 48
Channels 18
Checking the Device Data List 114
Choose Display 122, 128
Choose Display Screen 121
Choose Instrument Display 123
Clear Button 21, 22, 86
Clogged Gate Alarm 94
Closed Containers 11, 85
Common Mode Rejection 8
Common Mode Voltage Range 8
Compression Gasket 12
Configuration Menu 23, 55, 61
Configuration Options Page 55
Configuration Page 50, 55, 63
Configuration/Smart Diagnostics Card 56
Configuring Ingredients from the Browser 47
Configuring Ingredients from the Front Panel 24
Configuring the Filler/Dispenser from the Web Browser
46
Confirmation Page 127
Connectivity 3
Connector 11, 85
Control of the Rack_Size and Starting_Quarter Combinations 9
Control Output 81
Controllable Inputs 81
Controlled Static Environment 11, 85
Core Technologies 57
Corrective Action 60
Current Cycle 22
Current Fill/Dispense 22
Cut Off Frequencies 42
Cycle/7/PQRS Button 23
D
Data Bits 36
Data Bits Pull Down Menu 54
Data Menu 127
Daughter Card 4
Day-dd Field 54
DCS 2
Decimal Point Parameter 38
Decimal Point Pull Down Menu 51
Defaults Display 123
Device Data List 114
DeviceNet 7
Devicenet Address 120
DeviceNet Input and Output Tables
77
Index
DeviceNet Input Table 75, 79
DeviceNet Interface 3
DeviceNet Network 44
DeviceNet Output Table 79
DeviceNet Parameters 44
DeviceNet Tables 78
Diagnostic Menus 114
Diagnostics 114, 120, 126, 127, 130
Diagnostics Display 121, 127
Diagnostics Menus 114
Diagnostics Page 126
Dimensions of the Panel Cutout 12
Disassembly 11, 85
Disassembly and Reassembly Notes and Cautions
Discharge Alarms 94
Discharge Function 87
Discharge Gate Did Not Close Alarm 94
Discharge Gate Did Not Open Alarm 94
Discharge Gate Proof ON Radio Button 53
Discharge Gate Timer Field 53
Discharge is Complete 94
Discharge OFF Radio Button 53
Discharge ON Radio Button 53
Discharge Parameters 32
Dispensing A Vessel Using a Feeder 2
Dispensing from a Vessel to Another Vessel 2
Display 7
Display Increments (Graduations) 7
Do C2 Calibration 59
Do C2 Calibration Button 61
Do Cal High Button 63
Do Cal Low Button 63
Do Cal Low Calibration 63
Do Trad Cal 62
Dressed 17
Drives 44
Dual Speed 29
Excitation Monitor 7
Excitation Voltage 7
Exit Button 22
Extranet 1, 45
F
85
F - Verify Individual Load Cell Milli-Volt Readings 103
Factory Defaults 4, 122
Fail Display 122, 130
FALSE 78
Fanuc 6
Fast Fill Gate 86
FAST GATE DID NOT CLOSE 86
Fast Gate Did Not Close Alarm 86, 90
FAST GATE DID NOT OPEN alarm 86
Fast Gate Did Not Open Alarm 86, 90
Fastener Knobs 14
Fill 86
Fill Cycles 25, 117
Fill Timer 118
Fill Timer Field 49
Fill/Dispense Time Parameter 28
Filler/Dispenser Home Page 63, 127
Filler/Dispenser System 85
Filler/Dispenser/IBC 1
Filling a Vessel Using a Feeder 2
Float 77, 78
Flow Chart 85
Follow Proper Safety Procedures 12, 85
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT 134
Force Outputs 124
Force Outputs Function 124
Front Panel Display 21
Front Panel NEMA 4 Seal 8
Full Scale Output Sensitivity 116
Function Error 60
Function OK 60, 123
Function Selection Display 23
E
E - Non-Return to Zero 102
Electrical Installation 17
Electrical Parts 11, 85
Electrical Plug 11, 85
ELectrostatic Discharge 11, 12, 85
Embedded Controllers 44
Embedded Web Server 3
Enclosure Front Panel 13
Enclosure Size Requirements 12
Enter Button 22
Enter Parameters Button 49, 50
Environmental Requirements 8
ESD 11, 12, 17, 85
Ethernet - 10/100 Base T 7
Ethernet Card 46
Ethernet IP Port 3
Ethernet Parameters 45
EVEN 37
G
G - A/D Failure Error 105
Gain-in-Weight 25
Gate Proof OFF Radio Button 53
GE 6
General Policies and Information 134
General Troubleshooting Flow Chart Index 95
Getting Started 21, 57
Global Industry-Standard Communication Network
Grad 115
Grad Size Pull Down Menu 51
Graduation Size 115
Graduation Size Parameter 39
Gravity 58
Gravity Correction Factor 58
Gravity Corrector Factors Table 59
44
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
H
H - Mechanical Inspection 106
Hardy C2® Second Generation 57
Hardy Input and Output Tables 77
Hardy Instruments C2 Certified Load Sensors
Hardy Link Basic Mapping 74
Hardy Technical Support Technician 114
Hardy Web Site 1
Hardy Web Tech 1, 3
Help Button 21
Help Dialog 21
HFI0 78
HFI1 78
HI 215IT Junction Box 128
HI 215JB-SS1 or PS1 Series 10
HI 3000-RC 4
High and Low Level 34
High Level Sensor 34
High Security Code Number. 127
Higher-Level Controllers 44
History of Totals 1
Home Page 55, 130
Hour-hh field 54
http://www.hardyinstruments.com 1
Humidity Range 8
Hysteresis 114
3
I
I/O Mapping 81
IBC/Dispense Alarms 92
Individual Boolean Variable 77
Infra Red (IR) Port Parameter 42
Infrared (IR) 7
Ing./1 Button 22
Ingredient 117
Ingredient 1 24
Ingredient Name
Field 48
Ingredient Name Parameter 24
Initial Refill 34
Initial Refill OFF Radio Button 53
Input 7
Input Resistance 120
Input States Display 124
Input Table 79
Installation of Secure Memory Module 19
Installing Printed Circuit Boards 15
Installing the HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser 12
Installing the HI 3010 in a Panel 12
Installing the HI 3010 in a Swivel/Wall Mount 13
Installing the Smart Diagnostics (-SD) Card 16
Instrument Configuration 30
Instrument ID 31
Instrument ID Field 51
Instrument Local I/O 8
Instrument Selection Screen 23
Instrument Setup 52
Instrument Setup from the Browser 50
Instrument Setup Page 50
Internet 45
Internet (World Wide Web) 1
Internet Wizards 2
Intranet 1, 45
IP Address 120
IT Web Page 131
J
J - Electrical Inspection 107
J9 Terminal Block 18
-JB 4
Jog Alarms 88, 92
Jog Count 27, 118
Jog Count 49
Jog Count Alarm 93
Jog Count Pull Down Menu 49
JOG Cycle 93
Jog Gate Did Not Close Alarm 92
Jog Gate Did Not Open Alarm 92
JOG Hold Display 93
Jog Off Time 27
Jog off Time Field 49
Jog On Time 27, 118
Jog on Time Field 49
Jog Parameters 27
JOG Sequence 93
Junction Box 128
Junction Box Wiring 18
K
K - Load Sharing and Load Sensor Checkout
Key Pad 1
Knurled Knobs 17
L
Last Cal Time 115
Last Cal Type 114
Lattitude 58
Leakage Current 133
LED Display 1
Left Arrow Button 22
Left/Right Arrow Buttons 22
LHS 78
LHS (Left Hand Side) 78
List of Alarms 85
List of Destinations 81
Live Load 62
Load Cells 57
Load Point cables 21
Load Sensor 119
Load Sensor Number 58, 60
Local Relay 81
Lock Washers 11, 85
108
Index
Loss-in-Weight 25
Lost OK to Dispense Alarm 89
Lost OK to Fill Alarm 86
Low Level Sensor 34
LVDT and Half Bridge Load Cells/Sensors 18
M
M - Weight Reading Stops Incrementing
Main Board 16
Manual Button 21
Manual Mode 21
Map the Source 81
Mapped (Assigned) 81
Mapped Data 82
Mapped I/O 1, 3
Max I/O Data Capacity
109
9
Negate 78
NEMA 4 & 4X 12
NEMA 4X 4
No C2 Sensor 85
Non-C2 Load Point Connection
NONE 37
Non-Linearity 7
Normally Open 125
NOT 77
Not OK to Discharge Alarm 94
Not OK to Dispense Alarm 89
Not OK to FILL Alarm 85
Number of Cycles 1
number of graduations 39
Number of Sensors 119
18
O
Max. Percent (%) Field 50
Max. Weight Field 50
Maximum Target Weight Tolerance 50
Maximum Tolerance 26
-MB 5
Mean ADC Count 130
mean squared variation 122, 129, 130
Mechanical Installation 12
Mechanical Noise 3, 41
Millivolt 121
Millivolt Reading 121
Millivolt Readings 127
Min. Percent (%) Field 50
Min. Weight Field 50
Minimum Target Weight Tolerance 50
Minimum Tolerance 26
Minute-mm Field 54
Mixed Mapping 78
Mode 119
Monitor Page 49
Month-mm Field 55
Motion Error 85
Motion Tolerance 117
Motion Tolerance Field 52
Motion Tolerance Parameter 39
Motor Starters 44
Mounting Kit 11
Multiply 78
mV and Weight 121
mV and Weight Display 121
mV Reading 127
mV/V 127
mV/V and Weight 121
mV/V and Weight Display 121
O - Display Stuck on a Screen 111
ODD 37
Offset 78
OK to Discharge 32
OK to Discharge OFF Radio Button 53
OK to Fill Input Parameter 32
OK to Fill Timer Field 52
OK to Fill Times Out 86
OLE Technology (DCOM) 5
On-Board Diagnostics 4
On-board Help Files 3
Online Tech Support Knowledge Base 3
Operating Temperature
N
P
N - Blank Screen 110
Underdispense/Overdispense Alarms 91
Neatly Bundled 17
Panel Cutout Specifications 12
Panel Mount 21
Panel Mount (Model # HI 3010-PM
9
Operating Temperature Range 8
Operation/Diagnostics - Weight & Voltage Page
Operator ID 31
Operator ID Field 51
Options 4
Options Configuration 55
Options Menu 55
OR 77
Original Point of Removal 11, 85
Output Alarms 1
Output Relay #1 125
Output Relay Forced Closed 125
Output Table 75
Outputs 81, 82
OVER FILL 87
Over Refill Alarm 88
Overall Depth 12
OVERDISPENSE ALARM 91
OVERFILL ALARM 88
Overview of Typical Load Cell System 132
8
131
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Panhead Screw 16
Parallel Resistor 134
Parallel Shunt Resistor 134
PARAMETER NUMBER 78
PARAMETER VALUE 78
Parameters 114
PARAMID 78
Parity 36
Parity Pull Down Menu 54
Pass Display 122
-PB 4
PC Boards 16
PDA 128
Performance Diagnostics 1
Phillips Head Screw Driver 16
Physical Characteristics 8
Pick List 22
Ping Tool 133
PING Utility 133
PLC® 2
Power 8
Power and Relay Circuit Card 17
Power and Utility Requirements 7
Power Input J1 17
Power Supply
Reference Weight 61
Reference Weight Field 61
Refill 34, 89
Refill And Discharge Setup Page 53
Refill High Set Point 89
Refill OFF Radio Button 53
Refill Parameter 34
Refill Timeout Alarm 89
Refill Time-Out Parameter 89
Refill Vessel 34
Relay Output 81
Remote I/O 5
Removing Printed Circuit Boards 17
Repairs 11, 85
Resolution 7, 121
RESUME FILLING FAST 86
RESUME FILLING SLOW 87
Return to Factory Defaults Button 127
Return to Zero Test 123
-RIO 4
RIO Baud Rate
9
RIO Supported Features
9
RJ45 Connectors 46
Root Directory 133
RS 232 4
RS Networks® 3
RS-232 Serial Port 3
9
PP# = Program Part Number 114
Preset Time 86
Pre-Startup 124
Print Button 22
Print Current Fill Menu 22
Printed Circuit Boards 11, 85
Printer Baud Rate 119
Printer Data Bits 119
Printer Parity 119
Printer Port 3, 53
Process Weighing 1
Profibus 2, 6
Profibus (Process Fieldbus) 6
Profibus Interface 4
Program Version 114
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)
Proof Switch Alarm 32
Provide Feedback Link 3
Push Buttons 44
R
Read Only 115
READINTEGER 78
Rear Cover 13
Rear Plate 5
Reassembly 11, 85
Re-Calibrate 115
Recommended Load Cell Cable
Ref Point 58
Reference Point 58
Reference Weigh 61
18
S
5
Save Parameters Button 53, 56
Scale Capacity 116
Scale Capacity Field 51
Scale Capacity Parameter 41
SCR SWITCHING LOAD CIRCUIT
Screws 11, 85
Secure Memory Module 19
Secure Memory Module (SMM) 4
Security Violation 60
Selectable Predetermined 6
Selecting Configuration Menus 23
Sensitivity Specifications 116
Sensor Type 58
Sensor Type choices 58
Sensor Weight And Voltage 4
Sensors 44
Serial Number 120
Serial Port 4
Serial Port Device 53
Serial Port Parameters 36
Serial Port Pull Down Menu 53
Serial Port Setup Page 53
Serial RS 232 7
Service Manuals 11
Set Clock Parameter 42
Set Date/Clock Page 54
133
Index
Set Date/Clock Parameters 54
set point value (Target Weight) 25
Set the Span Value 62
Setup Data 22
Setup Wizards 3
Setup/3/DEF Button 23
Setup/Configuration Menus 21
Short Integer 78
Siemens 6
Silicon Controlled Rectifier 126
Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) 133
Simple Operator Interfaces 44
Single Speed 29
Sliding Average 41
Slotted Head Screwdriver 13
Slow Fill Proof Switch 119
Slow Fill Proof Timer 119
Slow Gate Did Not Close 91
Slow Gate Did Not Close Alarm 87
Slow Gate Did Not Open 90
Slow Gate Did Not Open Alarm 87
Small Fasteners 11, 85
Small Logic Controllers (SLC 5
Smart Diag. Ctrl 55
Smart Diagnostics 4, 127
Smart Diagnostics (-SD) Card Configuration from the
Front Panel 55
Smart Diagnostics Card 5
Smart Diagnostics Card Configuration from the PDA 55
Smart Diagnostics Card Configuration from the Web
Browser 55
Smart Diagnostics Card Menu 55
Smart Diagnostics Rear Plate 17
Smart Preact 118
SMM 4, 19
SMM (Secure Memory Module) 1
Solenoid 126
Solid State Relay 134
Solid State Relays 133
Spacers 11, 85
Span Value 62, 115
Span Weigh 63
Span Weight Field 63
Special (Command) Mapping) 78
Specifications 7
Specifications for Peripherals/Systems Components 10
Speed 118
Speed Parameter 29
Speed Pull Down Menu 50
Stability Test 4, 122, 129, 130
Stand-Alone Controller 1
Standard Interfaces 7
Standard SPST (Form A) Setpoint Relays 7
Standby Display 23, 114
Standby Mode 21
Standoffs 16
START Button 92
Start Button 21
State Logging 125
State Logging Function 125
State Logging Function ON 125
Storage Temperature Range 8
Sum 4
Support Section 1
Switch Time 29
Switch Timer 32
Switching a Light Load 133
Swivel Bracket 13
Swivel Mount 13
Swivel Mount (HI 3010-MB) 8
Swivel Mount Brackets 13
Swivel Mounted 1
Syntax 78
System Integrity Check and Fault Determination From
the Front Panel 114
System Integrity Check and Fault Determination From
the PDA 126
System Support 134
T
Tare Limit 52, 117
Tare Limit Parameter 40
Target Preact 25, 118
Target Preact Set Point 25
Target Weight 25, 117
Target Weight “Tolerance” Pull Down Menu 49
Target Weight Tolerance 26
Target Window 26, 118
Target Window (Wt-) 118
Target Window (Wt) 118
Target Window (Wt%+) 118
Target Window Weight (-) 118
Target Window Weight (%-) 118
Target Window Weight (%+) 118
Technical Support Department 1
Temperature Coefficient 8
Tension or Compression Type Load Cells 132
terminal blocks 18
Test and Data Menu 114, 120
Test Button 4
Test Channel #1 Button 131
Test Data Display 120
Test Results
FAIL 130
PASS 129
Test Weight 62
Test/9 button 127
Test/9/WXYZ Button 23
Texas Instruments 6
The Secure Memory Module 4
The WAVERSAVER® Parameter 41
Tied 17
Too Hi Error 85
Too Lo Error 85
HI 3010 Filler/Dispenser/IBC
Service Manual
Total Decimal Pont Parameter 39
Total Load 134
Totalizer 52
Totalizer Parameter 37
Totals 22
Trad Cal Error 85
Traditional 7
Traditional Cal Menu 62
Traditional Calibration 4, 57, 62
Traditional Calibration From the Front Panel 61
Traditional Calibration From the Web Page 63
Troubleshooting 85
Troubleshooting Techniques 134
Troubleshooting The Network Connections and Configuration with the "Ping" Tool 133
TRUE 78
Washers 11, 85
Watts Available for DeviceNet Power
WAVERSAVER 3, 7, 115
WAVERSAVER® 1, 3, 30
WAVERSAVER® Technology 3
Web Browser 46, 128
Weight 127
Weight Hopper 40
Weight Value 61
Wiring Harness 11, 85
WRITEFLOAT 78
WRITEINTEGER 78
WRITESTRING 78
Written Record 125
Y
Year-yyyy Field
55
U
UNDER FILL 87
UNDERDISPENSE ALARM 92
Underfill /Overfill Alarm 88
UNDERFILL ALARM 88
UNDERFILL Condition 93
Unit of Measure Parameters 38
Units 115
Units of Measure 23
Units of Measure Pull Down Menu 51
Units/5/JKL Button 23
Universal Power Supply 17
Unmap 82
Unpacking 11
Up/down Arrow Buttons 22
Update Rate 7
User Guide 11
User/-/_/@/blank/,/. Button 23
Using Smart Diagnostics From the Front Panel 127
Using Smart Diagnostics From the Web Browser 130
Using Solid State Relays with Light Loads 126
V
Vibratory Forces 42
View Input States 124
Voltage & Weight 121, 127
Voltage & Weight Displays 120
VPN 1
VPN (Virtual Private Network) 45
W
Wait Timer 118
Wait Timer Display 91
Wait Timer Field 49
Wait Timer Parameter 28
Waiting On Display 87
Wall Mount 13
WAP Enabled Devices 3
Warranty 134
Z
Zero Count 115
Zero Ct 62
Zero Point 62
Zero Tolerance 116
Zero Tolerance Field 52
Zero Tolerance Parameter
Zero Value 62
39
8
9440 Carroll Park Drive Suite 150, San Diego, CA 92121
Telephone: 1-800-821-5831
FAX: (858) 278-6700
Web Address: http://www.hardyinstruments.com
Copyright February 2002, Dynamic Instruments, All Rights Reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement